TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester Operating Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 255

TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester

Operating Manual
R20140925

http://www.tescom.co.kr

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Tescom.
Copyright 2004 Tescom Co., Ltd., Suite 927, Unitechvil, 142, Ilsan-ro, Ilsandong-gu, Goyang-si, Gyunggi-do, Korea
Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

General Information ........................................................................................................... 9

1.1 WARRANTY ....................................................................................................................................... 10

1.2 Safety Consideration .......................................................................................................................... 13


1.2.1 Injury Precautions .................................................................................................................. 13
1.2.2 Product Damage Precautions ................................................................................................ 13

1.3 Safety Symbols and Terms ................................................................................................................. 14

1.4 TESCOM Sales and Service Office .................................................................................................... 14

1.5 Manual Convention ............................................................................................................................ 14

1.6 Instruction and Key Features ............................................................................................................. 15


1.6.1 Key Features .......................................................................................................................... 15

1.7 Specification ....................................................................................................................................... 16

1.8 Connectors ......................................................................................................................................... 16

Installation ........................................................................................................................ 17

2.1 Initial Inspection .................................................................................................................................. 18

2.2 Power Requirement ............................................................................................................................ 18

2.3 Operating Environment ...................................................................................................................... 19

2.4 Carrying Handle and Caution for Moving ........................................................................................... 19

2.5 Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................................................................. 20

2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment........................................................................................................ 21


2.6.1 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................. 21
2.6.2 Storage ................................................................................................................................... 21
2.6.3 Shipment ................................................................................................................................ 21

Operation .......................................................................................................................... 24

3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 25
3.1.1 TC-3000C System Architecture .............................................................................................. 25
3.1.2 Start-up Screen ...................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.3 Shutdown Screen ................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.4 Display Color Scheme ............................................................................................................ 26
3.1.5 System Information ................................................................................................................ 27
3.1.6 Front Panel View .................................................................................................................... 27
3.1.7 Rear Panel View..................................................................................................................... 29


Table of Contents

3.1.8 Display Screen ....................................................................................................................... 30


3.1.9 Menu Structure ....................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.10 Access Main Functions ........................................................................................................ 32
3.1.11 Data Input and Change ........................................................................................................ 33
3.1.12 Enter and Change the Unit-of-Measure ............................................................................... 33
3.1.13 Interaction Between Screens ............................................................................................... 33
3.1.14 Tool Tips ............................................................................................................................... 33
3.1.15 Typical Test Configurations .................................................................................................. 34

3.2 Basic Operation Procedure ................................................................................................................ 35


3.2.1 Step 1. Getting Started ........................................................................................................... 35

3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer) ................................................................................................. 39


3.3.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT ...................................................................................... 39
3.3.2 Step 3. Viewing the Recorded Data ....................................................................................... 41

3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer) ................................................................................................ 44


3.4.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 Step 3. Viewing the Recorded Data ....................................................................................... 47

3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2) ....................................................................... 49


3.5.1 Step 3. Selecting the Measurement Screen........................................................................... 49
3.5.2 Step 4. Measuring RF Characteristics of DUT ....................................................................... 50
3.5.3 Step 5. Setting Up Test Mode and Parameters ...................................................................... 56

3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement) ........................................................................................ 57


3.6.1 Step 3. Selecting the EDR Measurement Screen .................................................................. 57
3.6.2 Step 4. Measuring EDR Characteristics of DUT .................................................................... 58

3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer) .............................................................................................. 61


3.7.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT ...................................................................................... 61
3.7.2 Step 3. Verification of Speech Loopback for Mono Headset .................................................. 63
3.7.3 Step 4. Measuring Audio Characteristics of DUT ................................................................... 64

3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test) ......................................................................... 69


3.8.1 Step 3. Selecting the Test Cases Screen ............................................................................... 71
3.8.2 Step 4. Selecting the Test Cases and Setting Up Test Parameters ....................................... 71
3.8.3 Step 5. Running the Test Cases and Viewing the Test Results ............................................. 72

3.9 Setting up for Bluetooth LE(Low Energy) Testing .............................................................................. 73

3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C ........................................................................................................ 74


3.10.1 Tester.................................................................................................................................... 74
3.10.2 DUT ...................................................................................................................................... 77
3.10.3 RF Settings........................................................................................................................... 79
3.10.4 Peripherals ........................................................................................................................... 79
3.10.5 Network ................................................................................................................................ 80

3.11 General Purpose Communication Analyzer ..................................................................................... 81


3.11.1 Signal Generator .................................................................................................................. 81
3.11.2 Signal Analyzer ..................................................................................................................... 82


Table of Contents

3.12 Store/Recall/Preset Instrument Settings .......................................................................................... 83

3.13 Checking List for Common Problems ............................................................................................... 83


3.13.1 Unit is inoperative ................................................................................................................. 84
3.13.2 Failure of testing ................................................................................................................... 84

Performance Test ............................................................................................................. 85

4.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 85


4.1.1 Recommended test equipment .............................................................................................. 86
4.1.2 Calibration Cycle .................................................................................................................... 86
4.1.3 TC-3000C Initial Set Up ......................................................................................................... 87

4.2 Signal Generator ................................................................................................................................ 87


4.2.1 Frequency Accuracy ............................................................................................................... 87
4.2.2 I/Q modulation calibration ...................................................................................................... 88
4.2.3 PLL phase noise ..................................................................................................................... 89
4.2.4 FM accuracy ........................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.5 Output level accuracy test ...................................................................................................... 91

4.3 Testing Receiver ................................................................................................................................. 92


4.3.1 Power measurement accuracy............................................................................................... 92
4.3.2 Maximum sensitivity ............................................................................................................... 94
4.3.3 Gain Roll-off ........................................................................................................................... 95

Programming Guide ........................................................................................................ 96

5.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 97

5.2 Getting Started.................................................................................................................................... 97


5.2.1 Settings for Ethernet(Host) remote control using DLL ........................................................... 99
5.2.2 Settings for USB(Host Controller) remote control using DLL ................................................. 99
5.2.3 Settings for RS-232C(Host Controller) remote control using DLL ....................................... 100
5.2.4 Settings for the RS-232C(Host) remote control without using DLL ..................................... 100
5.2.5 Preparing for your application using DLL ............................................................................. 101

5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands .................................................................................. 101


5.3.1 Configuration Command ...................................................................................................... 101
5.3.2 Access Command ................................................................................................................ 109
5.3.3 RF Test Cases Command ..................................................................................................... 110
5.3.4 Output Power(OP) ................................................................................................................. 110
5.3.5 Power Density(PD) ................................................................................................................ 111
5.3.6 Power Control(PC) ................................................................................................................ 112
5.3.7 Enhances Power Control(EPC)............................................................................................. 113
5.3.8 Frequency Range(FR) .......................................................................................................... 115
5.3.9 20dB Bandwidth(20BW) ........................................................................................................ 116
5.3.10 Adjacent Channel Power(ACP) ........................................................................................... 117
5.3.11 Modulation Characteristics(MOD) ....................................................................................... 118
5.3.12 Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance(ICFT) ........................................................................... 119


Table of Contents

5.3.13 Carrier Frequency Drift(CFD) ............................................................................................. 121


5.3.14 Single Slot Sensitivity(SS) .................................................................................................. 122
5.3.15 Multi Slot Sensitivity(SM) ................................................................................................... 123
5.3.16 Maximum Input Level(ML) .................................................................................................. 125
5.3.17 Quick Test(OPMOD) .......................................................................................................... 126
5.3.18 BER & FER ........................................................................................................................ 128
5.3.19 EDR Relative Transmitter Power(ETP) .............................................................................. 130
5.3.20 EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(EFSMA) ................................... 132
5.3.21 EDR Differential Phase Encoding(EDPE) .......................................................................... 135
5.3.22 EDR In-band Spurious Emission(ETP) .............................................................................. 136
5.3.23 EDR Sensitivity(ES) ........................................................................................................... 137
5.3.24 EDR BER Floor Performance(EBP) ................................................................................... 139
5.3.25 EDR Maximum Input Level(EML)....................................................................................... 140
5.3.26 Audio Test Command ......................................................................................................... 142

5.4 Example using command ................................................................................................................. 147

5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands................................................................................................ 148

5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control ........................................................................... 152

5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL ........................................................................................................ 157


5.7.1 General Function .................................................................................................................. 157
5.7.2 Tester Configuration ............................................................................................................. 157
5.7.3 DUT Configuration................................................................................................................ 174
5.7.4 Access Fucntions ................................................................................................................. 186
5.7.5 Security Fucntions ................................................................................................................ 188
5.7.6 Profile Fucntions .................................................................................................................. 188
5.7.7 Audio Fucntions .................................................................................................................... 190
5.7.8 Signal Generator .................................................................................................................. 191
5.7.9 RF Test Cases ...................................................................................................................... 192
5.7.10 Measurement Functions ..................................................................................................... 198

5.8 Flow Chart for DLL functions ............................................................................................................ 202

5.9 Example using DLL .......................................................................................................................... 205


5.9.1 Measuring Output Power ..................................................................................................... 205

Appendices .................................................................................................................... 209

Appendix A. Specification ....................................................................................................................... 210


5.1.1 RF SOURCE ........................................................................................................................ 210
5.1.2 RF ANALYZER ..................................................................................................................... 210
5.1.3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ...................................................................................................... 211
5.1.4 FM MODULATION ANALYZER ............................................................................................. 211
5.1.5 POWER-TIME ....................................................................................................................... 211
5.1.6 POWER-CHANNEL (BT Mode) ............................................................................................ 211
5.1.7 RX BER TEST (BT Mode) ..................................................................................................... 211
5.1.8 I-Q CONSTELLATION (EDR BT Mode) ................................................................................ 211


Table of Contents

5.1.9 TX BER TEST (BT Mode) ..................................................................................................... 211


5.1.10 DEVM (Differential Error Vector Magnitude) ....................................................................... 211
5.1.11 FREQUENCY REFERENCE .............................................................................................. 212
5.1.12 FRONT PANEL .................................................................................................................. 212
5.1.13 REAR PANEL ..................................................................................................................... 212
5.1.14 MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................................. 212

Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C ........................................................................................ 213


5.2.1 Output Power (TRM/CA/01/C) ............................................................................................. 213
5.2.2 Power Density (TRM/CA/02/C) ............................................................................................ 214
5.2.3 Power Control (TRM/CA/03/C)............................................................................................. 216
5.2.4 TX Output Spectrum – Frequency range (TRM/CA/04/C) ................................................... 218
5.2.5 TX Output Spectrum – 20 dB Bandwidth (TRM/CA/05/C) ................................................... 220
5.2.6 TX Output Spectrum – Adjacent channel power (TRM/CA/06/C) ........................................ 222
5.2.7 Modulation Characteristics (TRM/CA/07/C) ......................................................................... 224
5.2.8 Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance (TRM/CA/08/C) ............................................................ 226
5.2.9 Carrier Frequency Drift (TRM/CA/09/C) ............................................................................... 227
5.2.10 EDR Relative Transmit Power (TRM/CA/10/C).................................................................. 229
5.2.11 EDR Carrier Frequency Stability and Modulation Accuracy (TRM/CA/11/C) ..................... 231
5.2.12 EDR Differential Phase Encoding (TRM/CA/12/C) ............................................................ 233
5.2.13 EDR In-band Spurious Emissions (TRM/CA/13/C) ............................................................ 234
5.2.14 Sensitivity – single slot packets (RCV/CA/01/C) ................................................................ 236
5.2.15 Sensitivity - multi-slot packets (RCV/CA/02/C) .................................................................. 238
5.2.16 Maximum Input Level (RCV/CA/06/C) ............................................................................... 240
5.2.17 EDR Sensitivity (RCV/CA/07/C) ......................................................................................... 241
5.2.18 EDR BER Floor Performance (RCV/CA/08/C) ................................................................... 243
5.2.19 EDR Maximum Input Level (RCV/CA/10/C) ....................................................................... 244
5.2.20 List of abbreviations ........................................................................................................... 246
5.2.21 References ......................................................................................................................... 246

Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters .................................................................................... 247


Table of Contents

List of Figures

[Figure 1] Carrying Handle .............................................................................................................. 19


[Figure 2] Front Panel View ............................................................................................................. 27
[Figure 3] Rear Panel View ............................................................................................................. 29
[Figure 4] Typical Test Configurations ............................................................................................. 34
[Figure 5] Carrier frequency accuracy test ...................................................................................... 87
[Figure 6] I/Q modulation calibration test ........................................................................................ 88
[Figure 7] PLL phase noise test....................................................................................................... 89
[Figure 8] FM accuracy test ............................................................................................................. 90
[Figure 9] Output level accuracy test............................................................................................... 91
[Figure 10] Power measurement accuracy test .............................................................................. 92
[Figure 11] Maximum sensitivity test ............................................................................................... 94
[Figure 12] Gain Roll-off test ........................................................................................................... 95

List of Tables

[Table 1] Accessory List ................................................................................................................... 18


[Table 2] Power Requirement .......................................................................................................... 18
[Table 3] Access Main Functions ..................................................................................................... 32
[Table 4] Test Parameters Refer to DUT in Configuration. .............................................................. 40
[Table 5] Pattern Example ............................................................................................................... 81


1
Chapter

General Information

This chapter covers the instrument warranty, specifications, key features, and
safety consideration.
1.1 WARRANTY

1.1 WARRANTY
TESCOM warrants that this product is free from defects in terms of materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. During the warranty
period, TESCOM will -- at its discretion -- either repair or replace products that prove to be
defective.

For the warranty service or repair, the Customer must notify TESCOM of the defect before
the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance
of service. The Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective
product to the service center designated by TESCOM. The Customer shall prepay the
shipping charge to a TESCOM designated service center, and TESCOM shall pay the
shipping charge to return the product to the Customer. In case the Customer is located
outside of Korea, the Customer is responsible for all shipping charges including freight,
taxes, and any other charge if the product is returned for service to TESCOM.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate
malignance by the Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification
or misuse, accident, or abnormal conditions of operation.

TESCOM`s responsibility to repair or replace defective products is the sole and exclusive
remedy provided to the Customer in case of breach of this warranty. TESCOM will not be
liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages regardless of whether
TESCOM served advance notice of the possibility of such damages.

10
1.1 WARRANTY

11
1.1 WARRANTY

12
1.2 Safety Consideration

1.2 Safety Consideration


Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product
or any product connected to it:

1.2.1 Injury Precautions


 Use the Appropriate Power Cord
To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.
 Avoid Electric Overload
To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply voltage beyond the specified range
to a terminal.
 Ground the Product
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. In case no
ground is available at the power outlet, providing a separate grounding path to the
instrument is recommended by connecting wire between the instrument ground terminal
and earth ground to avoid electric shock or instrument damage. Before making
connections to the input or output terminals of the product, make sure that the product is
properly grounded.
 Do Not Operate Without Covers
To avoid electric shock or product damage, do not operate this product with the
protective covers removed.
 Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions
To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions.
 Do Not Use in a Manner Other than That Specified by the Manufacturer

1.2.2 Product Damage Precautions


 Use Appropriate Power Source
Do not operate this product using a power source that applies more than the specified
voltage. Main supply voltage fluctuations should not exceed  10% of the nominal
voltage.
 Provide Proper Ventilation
To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.
 Do Not Operate in case of Suspected Failures
If you think there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service
personnel.
 Environmental Conditions
Refrain from using this equipment in a place subject to considerable vibration, direct
sunlight, outdoors, and where the ground is not level. Likewise, do not use it where the
ambient temperature is beyond the range of 5 C - 40 C and altitude is more than
2000 m. The maximum relative humidity is 80 % for temperatures up to 31 C,
decreasing linearity of up to 50%, and relative humidity at 40 C, and Over voltage
Installation Category II for the main supply (Pollution Degree 2).
 Shut down System
Do not power switch off by compulsion, to avoid injury or damage the internal host PC.

13
1.3 Safety Symbols and Terms

In order to power off safely, press Menu  select “Quit”  press “Yes” and then
do power switch off.

1.3 Safety Symbols and Terms


These terms may appear in this manual.

WARNING: Warning statements describe the conditions or practices that could result in
injury or loss of life.

CAUTION: Caution statements describe the conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.

Symbols on the Product: The following symbols may appear on the product:

Power ON Power OFF WARRING / CAUTION Indicates earth


(ground) terminal

1.4 TESCOM Sales and Service Office


If you have difficulty with the product, call or write to our Technical Support specialists at:

TESCOM Company Limited


# 927 Unitechvil., 142, Ilsan-ro, Ilsandong-gu, Goyang-si, Gyunggi-do, Korea [ZIP 410-722]
TEL.: 82-31-920-6601 FAX: 82-31-920-6607
Email: tescom-sales@tescom.org
http://www.tescom.co.kr

1.5 Manual Convention

 [ ] This indicates menus following notational conventions.


 Keypad buttons are indicated with the symbol. ex) FCN
 key on the front is indicated as ENT.

14
1.6 Instruction and Key Features

1.6 Instruction and Key Features


TESCOM TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester eliminates the need for several costly testers by
combining key RF and Protocol test & measurement functions in one convenient box.
Designed for a wide range of applications in R&D, manufacturing, QA and service, this
feature-packed powerful instrument is simple to use, lightweight and portable, and may be
operated with all standard AC voltages. In addition to Bluetooth testing applications, TC-
3000C may be used for non-Bluetooth RF testing along the 2.4 GHz ISM band.

1.6.1 Key Features

 Bluetooth V1.1/V1.2/V2.0/V3.0/V4.0 Specification Compliant


 RF, Audio, and Protocol Combination Tester
 Bluetooth Conformance Test
 Supports Audio (SCO Link) Functional Testing (3000-10)
 Bluetooth RF and Baseband Measurement Functions (3000-20)
 Basic Bluetooth Protocol Analyzer Functions
- Supports Master and Slave modes
- Link test in Pico-net
- Packet information in Baseband, LMP, HCI, SDP, RFCOMM, and Profile
- Direct HCI command execution from the screen
 Bluetooth EDR testing (3000-40)
 Bluetooth LE testing (3000-50)
 Utility digital signal generator
 User definable Baseband IN/OUT ports for real time signal monitoring, external
modulation, audio source and audio analyzer
 Device HCI Interface Options: USB and RS-232C (UART, BCSP)
 Remote Operation: TCP/IP (LAN) and RS-232C
 Easy S/W Upgrades through USB
 Listed on the Bluetooth Qualified Products List (QPL) as a Development Tool
 CE Compliant: EN61010-2001, EN61326,A2:2001, EN61000-3-2, 2000, EN61000-
3-3,A1:2001

15
1.7 Specification

1.7 Specification
Specifications are listed in Appendix A.

1.8 Connectors

This section contains reference information for TC-3000C’s connectors.

Connector Specification

RS-232C Working Voltage: 100V


Dielectric Withstanding Voltage: 300V

Impedance: 50 ohm
N Type Connector Voltage Rating: 250 Vpeak
Dielectric Withstanding Voltage: 750 Vrms

Impedance: 50 ohm
BNC Connector
Voltage:  1Vpk

16
2
Chapter

Installation

This section provides the information needed to install the TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester,
including information pertinent to initial inspection, power requirements, environment,
upgrade, storage, and shipment.
2.1 Initial Inspection

2.1 Initial Inspection


This section provides information for verifying proper shipment of the TC-3000C Bluetooth
Tester.
Product Condition and Accessory Check
1. Upon receipt of the TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester, check for damage that could
have occurred during shipment.
2. Check whether you have received all the standard accessories supplied with
TC-3000C as listed in table below.

[Table 1] Accessory List

No. Part Number Name Specification Qty.


1 3407-0004 Adaptor N(m) to BNC(m) 1
2 4003-0012 RS-232C Cable DB9(s) to DB9(s) cable, 2 m 1

3 4006-0004 RF Cable N(m) to N(m) cable, 1 m 1

4 4007-0001 RF Cable BNC(m) to BNC(m) cable, 1 m 2

5 4008-0012 LAN Cable STP, Cross, RJ45 cable, 2 m 1


6 4008-0016 USB Cable USB A (p) to USB A (s) cable, 1.8 m 1
7 E92050A Antenna Sleeve 2.4 GHz 1
8 E99912A Attenuator 10 dB, 0.5W, N Type 1
9 Power Cord 2m 1
10 Operating Manual 1

To avoid hazardous electrical shock, do not perform electrical tests when there are
signs of shipping damage to the equipment.
WARNING

2.2 Power Requirement


This Tester is a portable instrument, requiring no physical installation other than connection
to a power source.

[Table 2] Power Requirement

Characteristic Requirement
Input voltage 100 VAC - 240 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption Less than 40 watt

18
2.3 Operating Environment

If AC power is beyond the range of operation, the equipment may malfunction or


sustain permanent damage. Main supply voltage fluctuations should not exceed 10%
WARNING of the nominal voltage.

2.3 Operating Environment


Refrain from using this equipment in a place subject to considerable vibration, direct
sunlight, outdoor, and where the ground is not level. Likewise, do not use it in areas where
the ambient temperature is beyond the range of 5 C ~ 40 C, and altitude is more than
2000 m.
The maximum relative humidity is 80 % for temperatures up to 31 C, decreasing linearity
to 50% relative humidity at 40 C. (Over voltage Installation Category II for main supply;
Pollution Degree 2)

The storage temperature range for this equipment is –20 C ~ 70 C, when this equipment
is not used for a long period of time, store in a dry place away from direct sunlight by
covering with vinyl or placing in a cardboard box.

2.4 Carrying Handle and Caution for Moving


Carrying Handle Adjustment
To adjust the handle position, push both caps covering the rotary joints on each side. .
Then, rotate the handle to the desired position.

Bench-top viewing position Carrying position

[Figure 1] Carrying Handle

Caution for moving


When you are moving the TC-3000C, please use USB cable protector on rear panel. If not,
USB cable between host and host controller could be damaged.

19
2.5 Firmware Upgrade

2.5 Firmware Upgrade


TC-3000C Firmware can be upgraded easily using USB memory. You can download the
upgrade data file from Tescom website.

Upgrade from the USB Memory


1. Download Firmware files from Tescom website.
2. Unzip the firmware files.
3. When you unzip file is created.
4. Save the “upgrade3000c.tgz” files to the USB Memory
5. Plug in the USB Memory at front panel USB port.
6. Press Menu  select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen 
M5 (Network” )
7. Move “more 3/3” using the F8 key and press F3 ( “Upgrade S/W” )
8. Select “USB Memory” from the pop-up menu and select “ok” button.

Get SBC s/w from:


i Please never downgrade to v2.30 or earlier unless you have BT option
Remote FTP USB Memory Cancel

Connect an USB Memory to USB Port;


i
And Please wait 5 seconds before pressing OK
OK Cancel

9. When Upgrade is completed successfully, select “ok” button

Upgrading DONE. Reboot to activate


i

OK Cancel

10. When the TC TC-3000C is turned off, turn off and on the rear panel power switch.
11. Turn on the front panel SW switch.

20
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

If download is failed, please check following cases.


[Case 1]: The connection cable between Host and Host Controller on rear panel
must be a USB cable.
[Case 2]: USB recognition time is different depends on USB Memory, so upgrade
should be started after recognition is finished. Usually, you can check it using the
LED lamp of USB memory.
[Case 3]: Even if you cannot upgrade using above cases, perform following steps
for Emergency Upgrade.
NOTE 1. Turn off the TC3000C.
2. Locate the “DOWNLOAD/NORMAL switch” at rear panel and set it to
DOWNLOAD.
3. Turn on the TC-3000C and repeat the upgrade procedure above.
4. When the upgrade is completed, turn off TC-3000C and return the download
switch to NORMAL position.
5. Turn on TC-3000C

2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

2.6.1 Cleaning
Periodically wipe the case with a damp cloth mild detergent; do not use abrasives or
solvents.
Keep the power supply free of dust. Clean the power inlet regularly. If dust accumulates
around the power pins, there is a risk of fire.

Clean the input terminal as follows:


1) Turn the TC-3000C off and remove all test leads.
2) Shake out any dirt that be in the terminals.
3) Soak a new swab with alcohol and work around in each terminal.

2.6.2 Storage
The storage temperature range for this equipment is –20 C to 70 C. When this
equipment is not used for a long period of time, covered with vinyl or placed in a
cardboard box, store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight.

2.6.3 Shipment
When shipping this equipment, use the original packing materials. If they are not available,
pack the equipment as follows:

1) Wrap this equipment, in appropriate shock absorbing materials and put it in a


corrugated cardboard box at least 5 mm thick. (If shipping to a TESCOM Service
Office, attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model
number and full serial number.)
2) Wrap its accessories separately in the same shock absorbing material and put

21
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

them in the same corrugated cardboard box together with this equipment.
3) Fasten the corrugated cardboard box with packing strings.
4) Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to assume careful handing.

Never use any chemical cleaner other than alcohol for the maintenance of this
equipment. Organic solvent such as benzene, toluene or acetone may spoil the
CAUTION plastic parts of this equipment

22
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

23
3
Chapter

Operation

This section describes the basic concepts and details of operating TC-3000C Bluetooth
Tester. Understanding the basic concepts of TC-3000C helps you use it effectively. Operation
Overview quickly shows you how TC-3000C is organized and gives some very general
operating instructions. After you read Operating Overview you can use Operation Procedure
for detail information.
3.1 Overview

3.1 Overview

The Overview section contains illustrations of the display, the front and rear panels, and the
menu system. These illustrations will help you understand and operate the TC-3000C.

3.1.1 TC-3000C System Architecture

TC-3000C is made up of two main blocks,


a RF/DSP module and host CPU module,
and is connected by a host controller
interface (HCI) that is identical to
Bluetooth system architecture. The
RF/DSP module provides an RF interface
to DUT, performs physical measurements
and manages the Bluetooth link. The
internal host CPU (PC), which runs on
Linux platform, takes care of user
interface (UI) functions including display,
key input and I/O controls for RS-232C,
USB, LAN and other standard peripheral
devices. The adoption of open OS
minimizes unnecessary constraints on
system optimization. This simple, elegant
system architecture takes advantage of
both power of DSP and convenience of
PC.

HOST and HOST controller must be connected to each other by USB except
for a case when TC-3000C uses an external HOST or HOST controller.
Note

25
3.1 Overview

3.1.2 Start-up Screen

When power on, the start-up screen will be displayed after booting process and will change
to initial screen 10 seconds later. Pressing any key will change the display immediately.

When TC-3000C is turned on, the instrument does not return to the power-off
condition –except for the Test Cases parameters which were saved - but
Note recalls the settings from the most recently saved memory location (STORE
Number).

TC-3000C
Bluetooth Tester
S/N:
S/W Options:

OK

3.1.3 Shutdown Screen


In order to power off, press Menu  select “Quit” from the pop-up menu on the screen 
press “Yes” . Or you can turn off the TC-3000C using the front panel soft switch

3.1.4 Display Color Scheme

The display color option allows you to change the display color scheme for the front panel
display. To change the color scheme, press Menu  select “Configuration” from the pop-
up menu on the screen  M4 ( “Peripherals” )  F5 ( “color scheme” )  select the
color scheme which you want to use.

26
3.1 Overview

3.1.5 System Information


In order to check system information of TC-3000C,
press Menu  select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M4
( “Peripherals” )  F8 ( “System Info” )  Verify: Serial Number, Version, Core Version,
DSP Version, FPGA Version, Software Options

3.1.6 Front Panel View


The front panel controls and connector are illustrated below; and the detailed descriptions
are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5

9
17

10

16 15 14 13 12 11

[Figure 2] Front Panel View

① Color Graphic LCD


The LCD display color is configured in the Peripherals of the Configuration
screen.
② F1 ~ F8 : Soft keys. Soft keys select submenus.
③ USB port : It is used for testing the BT USB Dongle, storing the test result,
capturing screen or system upgrade.
④ Data Input keypad. Provides the means for entering data.
⑤ INCR SET : Defining data increasing step. The default value is 1.
⑥ Recall : Recall stored data.
⑦ Marker : Enable a line-shaped marker on the Measurement screen to activate.
⑧ ENT : It is used to enter your chosen function or accept input.
⑨     : Cursor movement.

27
3.1 Overview

⑩ RF IN/OUT Port: N type RF connector


⑪ BS : Back space key
ESC : Return to the previous state.
FCN : Access second functions
⑫ Rotary knob: Move cursor. Push to accept data or function such as ENT .
⑬ MENU : Main menu key. When this key is pressed the pop-up menu is
displayed on the center of screen. This menu presents seven options including
main functions.
⑭ Baseband Input Ports: I-Rx, Q-Rx, I-Tx, Q-Tx, Rx-bit, Tx-bit. For using
external baseband signals. It is used for stereo headset test using A2DP
⑮ Baseband OUT ports: Rx (I, Q), Tx (I, Q), Demodulation, Modulation, RX and
TX bit streams, RX and TX Clocks. It is used for stereo headset test using A2DP.

16 Soft switch.


17 M1 thru M8 : Soft keys. Soft keys select test screen.

Second Functions (Blue Label Functions)


Additional functions available by FCN key.
FCN INCR SET (= PRESET): Preset the instrument to a predefined state.
FCN Recall (= SAVE): Store the current instrument settings into memory (1 to 7)
FCN Marker (= STEP): Defining moving step of the line markers in the measurement
screens.
FCN 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 (= A,B,C,D,E,F) : It is used when you enter
hexadecimal data.
FCN ESC (=Screenshot): Capturing current displayed screen.

Purpose of the front panel USB port


① for Bluetooth USB Dongle testing
② for copying test case report file, screen capture or firmware upgrade
③ When the USB memory stick is used, it should be used after the device is
recognized (2 ~ 3 sec).
Some USB memories could not be recognized. (For normal operation, the
Note USB device should support LINUX OS and composed only one drive.)
④ If the USB memory were removed during Reading/Writing operation, the
TC3000C could be shut down. Previous operation should be finished before
doing next operation.

28
3.1 Overview

3.1.7 Rear Panel View

The Rear panel connectors are illustrated below; detailed descriptions are as follows:
1 2 3

12

11

10

9
4
8
7
5

[Figure 3] Rear Panel View

① RS-232C: This port is a serial port to Host Controller.


② RS2/UART2/BCSP2: This port is a RS2/UART2/BCSP2/ port to Host.
③ EXT 10 MHz: This port is an external 10 MHz reference signal.
④ Power switch
⑤ AC Power Input: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
⑥ Emergency Firmware download switch: For upgrading firmware when Host
Controller doesn’t boot. This switch is not used after normal firmware
upgrading
⑦ Monitor connector: For using an external monitor.
⑧ RS-232C/UART 1/BCSP1 connector: This port is the first serial port to Host.
It can be used for the remote control.
⑨ LAN connector
⑩ USB : This port is a USB port to Host.
⑪ USB : This port is a USB port to Host.
⑫ USB : This port is a USB port to Host controller. It is for the remote control
with DLL.

29
3.1 Overview

3.1.8 Display Screen

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed


the tests will run once. When pressed
again while the tests are running, the
testing will stop.

Test progress
Indicator:
This progressive bar
indicates the status of Submenus related
test proceeding. to soft keys, F1 ~
F8

Status window: Some


messages are displayed
to help you to understand
current status easily.

Main function menu related


FCN Key Indicator: to hard key, MENU . This
When FCN key is pressed menu always displays the
the indicator is brightened. selected function.

mode
Screen menus related to
soft keys, M1 ~ M5 Link Status Indicator: It presents link
status, a HCI type that is connected to
Host and the number of current
configuration.

30
3.1 Overview

3.1.9 Menu Structure


TC-3000C has tree-like structure. 9 main functions have subcategories (screen menus)
respectively. Each subcategory has several submenus for setting up test parameters.

Pressing MENU key


HCI 2 (USB, RS-232C,
PCMCIA, UART, LAN)

Link Analyzer Host Analyzer Measurement Measurement2 Measure(EDR) Test Cases Audio SigGen Configuration

Link Link Spectrum BER Search Constel RF SCO Link FSK Tester
Pkt Info L2CAP FM Mod TX-BER Audio Test DUT
LMP RFCOMM Pow-Time DEVM Audio Spec RF Settings
HCI (AVDTP) Pow-Chan Audio Sweep Peripherals
Baseband SDP RX-BER Network
PROFILE
(AVRCP)

Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus

31
3.1 Overview

3.1.10 Access Main Functions


The TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester contains key RF and protocol test & measurement functions
in one package. Controls for these functions are arranged on several screens. The Link
Analyzer, Host Analyzer, Measurement, EDR Measurement, Audio Test, Signal Generator,
Test Cases, and Configuration screens contain most of the functions and fields associated
with testing Bluetooth receivers and transmitters. The screens are accessed using the
MENU key and soft keys, M1 ~ M5 .

Main Function ( MENU key) Test Screen ( MI ~ M5 )


Basic Actions – Discover/Connect/Discoverable
Tx/Rx Packet Information – Inquiry/Page/Channel
Link Analyzer LMP Messages
HCI Commands / Events
Baseband Packets Analysis

Basic Actions – Discover/Connect/Pairable


L2CAP
Host Analyzer RFCOMM (AVDTP)
SDP
PROFILE (AVRCP)

Spectrum
FM Modulation
Measurement Power vs. Time
Power vs. Channel
RX-Bit Error Rate (RX-BER)

Measurement2 BER Search

Constellation
Measurement(EDR) TX-BER
DEVM

RF (13 test cases, “Quick Test Function”, BER/FER, 7


Test Cases EDR test cases for EDR option )
RF (7 test cases for BT LE option)

SCO Link / SCO Loopback Test


Audio Test
Audio
Audio Spectrum
Audio Sweep

RF Signal Generator FSK Modulation

Tester
DUT
Configuration RF Settings
Peripherals
Network
[Table 3] Access Main Functions

32
3.1 Overview

3.1.11 Data Input and Change


1) Press soft key related to the desired input menu.
2) The cursor indicates data input position.
3) Change value with Rotary Knob or   keys. Or enter data with Key Pad.
4) Push Rotary Knob or ENT to confirm the inputted value.
5) BS (Back Space) key be used, if necessary.
6) Many menus display a list of choices when selected. Select a new setting from the
list.

3.1.12 Enter and Change the Unit-of-Measure


When the unit is implied, the current unit is used. For example; if the present Reference
Level is 0dBm, and you want to change it to 10 dBm, you would enter this sequence:
1 0 ENT
When the unit is specified, the units change to whatever you specify. For example; if the
present Reference Level is 0 dBm, and you want to change it to 10 mW, you would
enter this sequence:
1 0 mW
To change the present unit-of-measure, position the cursor in front of current unit and
press the key labeled with the desired unit
Available units:
Field Unit

Frequency MHz, kHz, GHz

Power dBm, uW, mW

3.1.13 Interaction Between Screens


Some menus operate globally; changing the setting in any screen automatically changes
that setting in all screens where it is available. Test Mode is an example of this menu type.
Ex) Configuration: DUT: Test Mode: Transmitter  MEASUREMENT: Spectrum: Test
Mode: Transmitter MEASUREMENT: FM Modul.: Test Mode: Transmitter 
MEASUREMENT: Pow-Time: Test Mode: Transmitter  MEASUREMENT: Pow-
Chan: Test Mode: Transmitter  Link Analyzer: LINK: Test Mode: Transmitter

3.1.14 Tool Tips

Throughout the GUI, tool tips provide useful information.


To display a tool tip, press FCN and Soft keys related to a menu. The tool tip
disappears when any key is pressed.

33
3.1 Overview

3.1.15 Typical Test Configurations


Diagrams below are an ideal set up for testing Bluetooth devices. Since most
Bluetooth devices use sealed antenna due to their size, final RF tests must be done
over the air (OTA). In case of module or PCB testing, contact probes may also be
used. In either case, testing must be completed under an adequately RF isolated
condition with reliable RF coupling.
If the DUT has a standard HCI, the TC-3000C can communicate with the DUT via
USB(HCI) of TC-3000C for control DUT.

Set Test Mode

HCI

Probe/ Connector

TC-59XX Shield Box

Set Test Mode

HCI

RF Coupler

TC-59XX Shield Box

HCI
TC506X
TEM Cell

Set Test Mode

[Figure 4] Typical Test Configurations

34
3.2 Basic Operation Procedure

3.2 Basic Operation Procedure

The following steps should be formed before other operation procedure to take
measurements.

3.2.1 Step 1. Getting Started


1. Make sure the connections have been made between HOST and HOST Controller on
the rear panel of the TC-3000C via RS-232C or USB.
2. Connect the RF port of theTC-3000C to the DUT using RF cable or the 2.4GHz
antenna.

To maintain regulatory compliance, OTA (over to air) connection to the DUT


must be carried out within an adequately RF isolated environment with reliable
Caution RF coupling.

3. If DUT has the HCI port, connect the DUT to the USB ports on the front panel of the
TC-3000C.
4. Set DUT to the Inquiry/Page scanning mode with test mode enabled. If the DUT is
connected to the TC-3000C by using a standard USB(HCI), you don’t need to do this
step because the TC-3000C can control the DUT automatically.

Before running a test the DUT must be initialized so that it is Inquiry/Page


scanning. If test mode is not enabled, the TC-3000C will use null packet mode
Caution for measurement and test.

5. Press the soft switch (Item #16 in the figure on page 24) on the front panel. After the
system booting process, the TC-3000C display the Start-up screen that is going to be
changed to initial test screen 10 seconds later.
6. Make sure the “HCI Port” of DUT configuration: Press Menu  Select
“Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M2 (DUT)  F3 (HCI
port). Make sure the “HCI Port” of DUT configuration is correct for the HCI port of the
TC- 3000C in use. If the DUT is not connected to the HCI port of the TC-3000C, “None”
must be selected.

35
3.2 Basic Operation Procedure

When TC-3000C is turned on, the instrument always recalls the settings from
the most recently saved register. But if the TC-3000C can’t find any DUT in
the preset HCI port while the TC-3000C is turned on, “HCI Port” of DUT
Caution configuration is set to “None”..

7. Make sure the “DUT Type” of DUT configuration: Press Menu  Select
“Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M2 (DUT)  F2 (DUT
Type). Make sure the “DUT Type” of DUT configuration is correct.

8. Input the Path Loss: Press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu
on the screen
M2 (DUT)  F7 (Path Loss). Input the path loss value from the TC-3000C to the
DUT.
9. Select the Test mode (Transmitter, Loop back or Null Packet): Press Menu 
Select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M2 (DUT)  Press F8
three times for “More 4/4” menu  Press F2 and select a test mode from the drop
down menu.

36
3.2 Basic Operation Procedure

DUT Type: Select DUT Type from


General, BT and BT LE

HCI Port: The HCI port on the rear


panel of the TC-3000C, which the
DUT is connected.

Path Loss: The path loss between


the TC-3000C and the DUT.

Test Mode: You can choose Loopback or Transmitter or


Null Packet. Null Packet mode is used to test DUT that
has no test mode support. In this mode, the TC-3000C
uses the packets without payloads and measurements are
not performed in accordance with the Bluetooth Test
specification and some test cases can’t be carried out. A
NULL packet has no payload but can be used for power,
initial frequency, and spectrum without having to activate
test mode.

More 4/5: Press F8 in sequence to


access “More 4/5” screen.

10 Input the PIN code: In case DUT requires authentication to connect, press Menu
 Select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M1 (Tester) 
Press F8 two times for “More 3/5” menu. Configure PIN type, PIN length, and PIN
code.

PIN Type: Fixed or Variable

PIN len. (Byte): Length of PIN


code in bytes

PIN code

11 If you want to configure the TC-3000C, the DUT, and RF conditions more in detail,
press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen.

37
3.2 Basic Operation Procedure

Skip pairing by using Link Key

Bluetooth encryption is a multi-staged process that provides devices with secure,


encrypted communications. The process begins with a device prompting the user
for a Personal identification Number (PIN). When the right PIN is entered, the DUT
begins an encryption setup dialogue with the TC-3000C. At the beginning of this
dialogue, the DUT and the TC-3000C agree on a Link Key. A Link Key is a 128-bit
value that the two devices use for authentication. When the DUT and TC-3000C
agree on a Link Key, the DUT then negotiates for the transfer of the Encryption Key
from the TC-3000C. The Encryption Key is used to encrypt and decrypt messages.
If you know the Link Key, you can skip the process with PIN code and reduce the
test time. To enter Lin key, press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the pop-
up menu on the screen  M1 (Tester)  Press
Note F8 three times for “More 4/6” menu.  Press F6 , to check Skip Paring menu
 Press F7 and enter Link key.

Skip the inquiry procedure

The inquiry procedure enables a Bluetooth Device to discover which units are in
range, and what their device addresses and clocks are. It take 5 ~ 10 seconds to
complete. If you already know the BD address of DUT, you can skip the inquiry
procedure. To enter BD address, press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the
pop-up menu on the screen  M2 (DUT)  Press F8 one times for “More
2/4” menu. Press F2 , to uncheck “Inq. Supported” menu  Press F8 again
for “More3/4” menu  Press F2 and enter the BD address.

38
3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

3.3.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT

If you want to view higher protocol data; L2CAP, RFCOMM, SDP, and Profile,
use the Host Analyzer screen to create connection to DUT. In the Link Analyzer
Note screen, higher protocols do not use to make a connection to DUT.

“ 3.2 Basic Operation Procedure” should be performed before following steps.


Note

1. Selecting the Link Analyzer Screen: Link Analyzer screen can be accessed by pressing
the Menu hard key. Press Menu  Rotary Knob or    Select “Link
Analyzer” from the pop-up menu on the screen  Press ENT .
Discover: Searches for all Bluetooth
devices that are in range and in
Inquiry Scan Mode through the Inquiry
Show Devices Found: This procedure.
window display details about the
found devices. Connect/Disconnect: Creating connection to
highlighted DUT on the screen through the Page
procedure or disconnecting. This menu is
displayed when a DUT is discovered and listed on
the screen. If the highlighted DUT is connected,
this menu is changed to “Disconnect”.

SCO connect: Create SCO connection


to a highlighted DUT on the screen.

Set Test Mode: Activate Baseband link


with a DUT in test mode

Discoverable: Enables the TC-3000C to


the Inquiry/Page Scan Mode.
Change submenus: For setting
Reset: Resets the TC-3000C. In case
up Inquiry, Page, and test mode
DUT is connected to the TC-3000C with
parameters.
HCI, the DUT is reset simultaneously.

39
3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

2. Setting up # Inq. Response: You can set the Inquiry to end after the “# Inq.
Responses” (1 to 16). If there are several DUT that have to respond to Inquiry, set the
number of Inquiry response to more than 1. But if there is only one DUT, set the
number of Inquiry response to 1 for testing speed. TC-3000C will stop discovering
when receives this number of inquiry responses or the Inquiry Timeout is expired.
Press F8 one times for “More 2/4” menu  Press F4
3. Search for DUT: Press F8 three times for “More 1/4” menu  press F2 key to
search for all Bluetooth devices that are in range and in Inquiry Scan Mode through
the Inquiry procedure. If the DUT is connected to the TC-3000C through the HCI port,
the TC-3000C read the Bluetooth device (BD) address and controls the DUT directly
through USB(HCI). If you want to stop Inquiry process, press F2 key again.
4. Select a DUT: Select a DUT that you want to test in the found devices by using
Rotary Knob or 
 keys.
5. Connect/Disconnect: Create connection to highlighted DUT on the screen through
the Page procedure by pressing F3 . When the highlighted DUT is connected, this
menu changes to “Disconnect”. If you want make a SCO connection, press F4 .
6. Set DUT to Test Mode: Enable DUT to the test mode by pressing F5 . If DUT is not
connected, the page procedure will be performed. If there is no DUT found, the
discovering (inquiry) procedure will start first.

If you want to edit test configuration in detail, you can access to configuration
menus by pressing F8 in sequence. These menus operate globally; changing the
Note settings in this screen automatically changes that setting in all screens where it is
available. Refer to “3.9 Configuration”

[Inquiry Parameters ]
Parameters Range Default Descriptions
Inq. TO (1.28s) 1 ~ 48 48 Refer to Tester in Configuration
Page TO (slts) 1 ~ 65535 16000 Refer to Tester in Configuration
# responses 0 ~ 16 1 Refer to Tester in Configuration
HCI TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000 Refer to Tester in Configuration

[ Scan Parameters ]
Parameters Range Default Descriptions
Access Type Discoverable Full Access Accessibility to Tester as a slave
Connectable
Full Access
T inqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T winqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T pagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T wpagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18 Refer to Tester in Configuration
Scan TO (ms) 10000 ~ 600000 Inquiry/Page Scan Timeout of Tester

[Table 4] Test Parameters Refer to DUT in Configuration.

40
3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

3.3.2 Step 3. Viewing the Recorded Data

1. Packet Information: This screen shows how many packets received and transmitted
for each packet type. To access Pkt Info screen, press M2 soft key.

Inquiry/Page packet information: These windows display


how many packets are received and transmitted during
Inquiry/Page/Inquiry Scan/Page Scan procedure.

TX Power: Defines TX power of the Tester

Clear screen: Resets all values to 0


Stop Update/Restart Update: It stops or restarts
updating of the tx/rx packet information.

Channel Information: This window


displays the channel traffic information.

2. LMP messages: This screen shows the LMP messages exchanged between the TC-
3000C and the DUT. To access LMP screen, press M3 soft key.

LMP Messages: This window displays the


LMP messages exchanged between the TC-
3000C and the DUT.

Clear Screen: Clears all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages.

Parameters window: This window


shows detail parameters about the
highlighted LMP message.

41
3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

3. HCI commands and events: This screen shows the HCI commands and events sent
between the TC-3000C and the DUT, both from TC-3000C’s side and DUT’s side. To
access HCI screen, press
M4 soft key.
Commands/Events: This window displays the
HCI commands/events sent between the TC-
3000C Host and Host controllers (TC-3000C and
DUT).

Clear Screen: Clear all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages

Select Source: Select TC-3000C or


DUT as the reference side to display
commands and events
Parameters window: This window shows detail
parameters about the highlighted HCI commands or
event.

42
3.3 Operation Procedure (Link Analyzer)

4. Baseband Packets: This screen shows the Baseband Packets transmitted between
the TC-3000C and the DUT in hexadecimal. To access Baseband screen, press M5
soft key.

Baseband Packets: This window displays the


Start Record: When this menu is checked the
master clock, time offset from start of Rx slot in
TC-3000C begins to record the Baseband
hundreds nano-seconds, and the Baseband
packets during the record time or until getting
Packets transmitted between the TC-3000C and
as many packets as specified in the Num Pkts
the DUT in hexadecimal.
menu. When the recording is finished this
menu is set to unchecked.

Record time: The TC-3000C records


the Baseband packets during this time.
“0” mean unlimited time.

Number of packets: The TC-3000C


records the Baseband packets until
getting as many packets as specified in
the menu.

Packet Mask: This menu lets you select


the packet categories for triggering.

Access code / Header / Payload


First 9 bytes represent an Access code, next Cursor movement functions: For
3 bytes represent a Header after FEC (only easy scrolling the messages
18 bytes are meaningful. Payload starts from
13th byte. Clear Screen: Clear all packet information

43
3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

3.4.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT

“ 3.2 Basic Operation Procedure” should be performed before following steps


NOTE

Higher protocol data can be recorded in the Host Analyzer screen. In this screen, TC-3000C
also uses upper layer protocols; L2CAP, RFCOMM (AVDTP), SDP, and Profiles (AVRCP) to
make a connection to a DUT.

1. Selecting the Host Analyzer Screen: Host Analyzer screen can be accessed by pressing
the Menu hard key. Press Menu  Rotary Knob or    Select “Host
Analyzer” from the pop-up menu on the screen  Press ENT .
Discover: Searches for all Bluetooth
devices that are in range and in
Inquiry Scan Mode through the Inquiry
Show Devices Found: This procedure.
window display details about the
found devices. Connect/Disconnect: Creating connection to
highlighted DUT on the screen through the Page
procedure or disconnecting. This menu is
displayed when a DUT is discovered and listed on
the screen. If the highlighted DUT is connected,
this menu is changed to “Disconnect”.

SCO connect: Create SCO connection


to a highlighted DUT on the screen.

Pairable: Enables the TC-3000C to be


responder in scanning and pairing
procedure.

Change submenus: For setting Reset: Resets the TC-3000C. In case


up Inquiry, Page, and test mode DUT is connected to the TC-3000C with
parameters. HCI, the DUT is reset simultaneously.

44
3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

2. Setting up # Inq. Response: You can set the Inquiry to end after the “# Inq.
Responses” (1 to 16). If there are several DUT that have to respond to Inquiry, set the
number of Inquiry response to more than 1. But if there is only one DUT, set the
number of Inquiry response to 1 for testing speed. TC-3000C will stop discovering
when receives this number of inquiry responses or the Inquiry Timeout is expired.
Press F8 one times for “More 2/5” menu  Press F4
3. Setting up the profile type of DUT: You should define the profile type of DUT, before
beginning tests. To select the profile type, press F8 three times for “More 5/5”
menu in the Host Analyzer screen. press F2 and select the profile type of DUT.
4. Search for DUT: Press F8 for “More 1/5” menu  press F2 key to search for
all Bluetooth devices that are in range and in Inquiry Scan Mode through the Inquiry
procedure. If the DUT is connected to the TC-3000C through the USB(HCI) port, the
TC-3000C read the Bluetooth device (BD) address and controls the DUT directly
through HCI. If you want to stop Inquiry process, press
F2 key again.
5. Select a DUT: Select a DUT that you want to test in the found devices by using
Rotary Knob or 
 keys.
6. Connect/Disconnect: Create connection to highlighted DUT on the screen through
the Page procedure by pressing F3 . When the highlighted DUT is connected, this
menu changes to “Disconnect”. To make a SCO connection, press F4 .

If you want to edit test configuration in detail, you can access to configuration
menus by pressing F8 in sequence. These menus operate globally;
NOTE changing the settings in this screen automatically changes that setting in all
screens where it is available. Refer to “3.9 Configuration.

[ Inquiry Parameters ]

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


Inq. TO (1.28s) 1 ~ 48 48 Refer to Tester in Configuration
Page TO (slts) 1 ~ 65535 16000 Refer to Tester in Configuration
# responses 0 ~ 16 1 Refer to Tester in Configuration
HCI TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000 Refer to Tester in Configuration

[ Scan Parameters ]

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


Access Type Discoverable Full Access Accessibility to Tester as a slave
Connectable
Full Access
T inqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T winqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T pagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 Refer to Tester in Configuration
T wpagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18 Refer to Tester in Configuration
Scan TO (ms) 10000 ~ 600000 Inquiry/Page Scan Timeout of Tester

45
3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

[ Profile Parameters ]

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


L2CAP Timeout
L2CAP TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000
Defines the timeout of L2CAP commands execution
RFCOMM Timeout
RFCOMM TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000 Defines the timeout of RFCOMM commands
execution
SDP Timeout
SDP TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000
Defines the timeout of SDP commands execution
Profile Timeout
Profile TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000
Defines the timeout of Profile commands execution
Type of Profiles
None
Defines the profile type of DUT. If you select
Headset
Type of Profiles Handsfree “None”, only the lower layers of protocol are used to
Handsfree
make a connection with DUT in the same way as
AudioGateway
Link Analyzer.
If the DUT support the microphone and speaker
gain controls, checking this option enable TC-
Gain control Unchecked 3000C to control the volume of it.
Checking this menu causes “Speaker Volume” and
“Mic Volume” menu to be showed below.
Speaker Volume
Speaker Volume 0 ~ 15 15 Specifies the volume of DUT speaker in
consideration of the gain.
Microphone Volume
Specifies the volume of DUT microphone in
Mic Volume 0 ~ 15 15
consideration of the gain.

46
3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

3.4.2 Step 3. Viewing the Recorded Data

1. L2CAP Messages: This screen shows the L2CAP messages exchanged between the
TC-3000C and the DUT. To access L2CAP screen, press M2 soft key.

L2CAP Messages: This window displays the L2CAP


messages exchanged between the TC-3000C and the DUT.

Clear screen: Clears all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages.

Parameters window: This window


shows detail parameters about the
highlighted L2CAP message.

2. RFCOMM messages: This screen shows the RFCOMM messages exchanged


between the TC-3000C and the DUT. To access RFCOMM screen, press M3 soft key.

RFCOMM Messages: This window displays the


RFCOMM messages exchanged between the
TC-3000C and the DUT.

Clear screen: Clears all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages.

Parameters window: This window


shows detail parameters about the
highlighted RFCOMM message.

3. SDP Messages: This screen shows the SDP messages exchanged between the TC-
3000C and the DUT. To access SDP screen, press M4 soft key.

47
3.4 Operation Procedure (Host Analyzer)

SDP Messages: This window displays the SDP


messages exchanged between the TC-3000C
and the DUT.

Clear screen: Clears all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages

Parameters window: This window shows


detail parameters about the highlighted SDP
message.

4. Profiles : This screen shows AT Commands transmitted between the TC-3000C and the DUT .
To access Profile screen, press M5 soft key.

Profile Messages: This window displays


the Profile messages exchanged
between the TC-3000C and the DUT.

Clear screen: Clears all messages

Cursor movement functions: For


easy scrolling the messages

48
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)


This chapter describes the operation procedure of RF Measurement.

When you select the measurement screen or run the test cases, the TC-3000C makes a
connection to DUT that is discovered firstly and begins to test automatically although there
are several BT devices nearby. If you want to test a specific device in several devices, go
through the step 2 in the Link Analyzer screen or Host Analyzer screen in advance.

If there is a connection with DUT already, the TC-3000C begins the test immediately
without the connection procedure.

3.2 “Basic Operation Procedure” should be performed before following steps.


NOTE

3.5.1 Step 3. Selecting the Measurement Screen

Measurement can be accessed by pressing the Menu hard key. Press Menu 
Rotary Knob or    Select “Measurement” from the pop-up menu on the screen
 ENT

When you select the measurement screen, the TC-3000C makes a connection to DUT that
is discovered firstly and begins to measure RF signals automatically.

49
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

3.5.2 Step 4. Measuring RF Characteristics of DUT

1. Spectrum Analyzer: To access the spectrum analyzer screen, press M1 soft key.
This screen shows the spectrum of a channel in single channel or hopping mode.

Center Frequency Start/Stop: When this menu is


Channel: Selects the carrier frequency
Resolution Band Width pressed the tests will run once.
channel, one of 79 channels or Hopping
20dB Band Width When the menu is pressed again
mode. (Channel 0-78 : 2.402 – 2.480 GHz)
while the tests are running, the tests
will stop. Span: Selects full screen frequency
span width.

Num of sweep: Specifies the number of times


that the analyzer sweeps the displayed
frequency span. This value directly affects
how long it takes to complete a measurement.

Trace Mode: Selects tracing mode, Average


or Maximum hold.

Ref. Level: Specifies the amplitude reference


level. The top line of the display is the
reference level. All signals displayed are
reference to this line.

Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the dB/div: Sets the vertical amplitude per division
screen to find the signal’s frequency and amplitude. To
activate a maker, press the Marker key in sequence. Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test Mode
An activated marker changes to a solid line. Turn the connection with the DUT
knob to place the marker at the signal.

Readouts of markers amplitude and frequency: The


marker readouts have the same color as the marker
respectively. “d” displays a frequency difference between
yellow and red marker.

Parameters Range Default


Channel 0 ~ 78, Hopping Hopping
Span (MHz) 1, 1.25, 2, 2.5, 5, 10 10
Num of sweeps 1 ~ 50 1
Trace Mode Average / Maxhold Average
Ref. Level (dBm) -80 ~ 40 -80 + Path Loss ~ 40 + Path Loss
dB/div 1 ~ 20 10

50
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

2. FM Modulation: To access FM Modulation screen, press M2 soft key. This screen


shows the modulation characteristics of a channel in single channel or hopping mode.

All following values are measured between yellow and blue marker.
offset: Carrier Frequency offset
Center Frequency: dev: Average of absolute deviation values Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the
Displays channel rms: RMS value of deviation tests will run once. When pressed again
frequency. pk(+): Positive maximum deviation while the tests are running, the testing will
pk(-): Negative maximum deviation stop.

Channel: Select the carrier frequency


channel, one of 79 channels or Hopping
mode. (Channel 0-78: 2.402 – 2.480 GHz)

Freq/Div: frequency value of one vertical grid


on screen
1.3 MHz Filter: Enables 1.3 MHz Low Pass
Filter
Start Time: Specifies the start point to display the
measured signals. “0” means the start point of a
slot time (625 uS).

Time (us)/div: Sets the horizontal time per


division
Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the
screen to find the signal’s frequency and time. To activate Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test Mode
a maker, press the Marker key in sequence. An connection with DUT
activated marker changes to a solid line. Turn the knob to
place the marker at the signal.

Readouts of markers time and frequency: The marker


readouts have the same color as the marker respectively.

Parameters Range Default


Channel 0 ~ 78 Hopping
1 Ver Div. (kHz) 10 ~ 1000 100
1.3 MHz Filter Checked

Start Time. (us) -70~ 3124


0.1~ 60 @ 1 slot packet
Time(us)/div 0.1~ 180 @ 3 slots packet
0.1 ~ 300 @ 5 slots packet

51
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

3. Power versus Time: To access Pow-Time screen, press M3 soft key. This screen
shows the channel power measure of a channel in single channel or hopping mode.

Channel Frequency Start/Stop: When this menu is


Average Power pressed the tests will run once. Channel: Selects the channel, one of 79
Peak When the menu is pressed again channels or Hopping mode. (Channel 0-78 :
P while the tests are running, the tests 2.402 – 2.480GHz)
o will stop.
Ref. Level: Specifies the amplitude reference
w
level. The top line of the display is the
e
reference level. All signals displayed are
r
reference to this line.

dB/Div: Sets the vertical amplitude per


division

1.3 MHz Filter: Enables 1.3 MHz Low


Pass Filter

Start Time: Specifies the start point to


display the measured signals. “0” means
the start point of a slot time (625 us).

Time(us)/div: Sets the horizontal time


per division
Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the
screen to find the signal’s amplitude and time. To activate Test mode: Configures Bluetooth test
a maker, press the Marker key in sequence. An Mode connection with DUT
activated marker changes to a solid line. Turn the knob to
place the marker at the signal.

Readouts of cursors time and frequency: The marker


readouts have the same color as the marker respectively.

Parameters Range Default


Channel 0 ~ 78, Hopping Hopping
Ref. Level (dBm) -80 ~ 40 -80 + Path Loss ~ 40 + Path Loss
dB/div 1 ~ 20 10
1.3 MHz Filter Checked
Start Time (us) -70 ~ 3124
0.1 ~ 60 @ 1 slot packet
Time(us)/div 0.1 ~ 180 @ 3 slots packet
0.1 ~ 300 @ 5 slots pakcet

52
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

4. Power versus Channel: To access Pow-Chan screen, press M4 soft key. This
screen shows the channel power measures of every channels, 0~78.

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests will


run once. When the menu is pressed again while the
tests are running, the tests will stop. dB/Div: Sets the vertical amplitude per
division

Ref. Level: Specifies the amplitude reference


level. The top line of the display is the
reference level. All signals displayed are
reference to this line.

Up/Down Remote Tx: Increasing/Decreasing


the DUT TX power. This function is available
only when the DUT supports the power control
option. The step size depends on the DUT
specification (2~ 8 dB).

Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test


Mode connection with DUT

Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the


screen to find the channel’s amplitude and set reference
amplitude. To activate a maker, press the Marker key
in sequence. An activated marker changes to a solid line.
Turn the knob to place the marker at the signal.

Readouts of markers channel and amplitude: The marker


readouts have the same color as the marker respectively.

Parameters Range Default


dB/div 0 ~ 20 10

Ref. Level (dBm) -80 ~ 40 -80 + Path Loss ~ 40 + Path Loss

53
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

5. BER (Bit Error Rate): To access BER screen, press M5 soft key. The DUT
sensitivity is determined by using a Bit Error Rate (BER). This screen shows the BER
measurements that are carried out by comparing data in the payload fields transmitted
by the TC-3000C with data in the payload fields received from the DUT. This test is
performed in Loopback test mode without regard to the preset test mode.

BER: Displays the BER measure to the The top line of the display is the reference
sent bytes that are specified in “Length” level 100%. The vertical percent per division
menu. go down by one tenth.

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests


will run once. When pressed again while the
tests are running, the testing will stop.

DUT RX level: Sets expected value of DUT Rx


Power.

Bytes to Test: Specifies the length of


data to measure.

Dirty TX: Enables “Dirty Transmission


mode” TC-3000C transmits the dirty
transmitter signal in accordance to the
Bluetooth Test Specification.
Line Markers: You can place line-shaped marker on
the screen to set reference BER. Turn the knob to
place the marker at the screen.

Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test


Readouts of marker BER and bit stream information: Mode connection with DUT
The cursor BER, the total sent bytes, the Error bits, and
the cumulated BER are displayed. The cumBER
(cumulated BER) displays BER measure to total sent
bytes.

Parameters Range Default


DUT RX level (dBm) -80 ~ 0 0

Bites to Test 0 ~ 500000 10000

Dirty TX Unchecked

54
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

6. BER Search : This function will automatically find the sensitivity level for BER Spec (ex
0.1%). To execute BER Level Search function, the DUT must support loopback test mode.
The most top line means 100% and next
Display currently executing lines mean 1/10 of above line (Log scale)
RF level and BER Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the
tests will run once. When the menu is
pressed again while the tests are running,
the tests will stop.

Start Level: Set start power for BER Level


Search
Stop Level: Set last power for BER Level
Search
Step Level: Set step Power of BER Search

BER Spec: Set BER Spec.


Bytes to Test: Specifies the length of data
to measure

Dirty TX: Enables “Dirty Transmission


Line marker, Level and BER: When the start key is mode” TC-3000C transmits the dirty
pressed to run BER search function, the TC3000C will fine transmitter signal in accordance to the
sensitivity level and the Line marker will be placed that Bluetooth Test Specification.
sensitivity level position. Press the marker key to make it
active and display BER value of marker line.

Line marker and BER Spec(%) value: When the start key
is pressed, it will display target BER spec value. If the
marker is activated, it will display the BER value of marker
line.

Parameters Range Default


Start Level(dBm) -80 ~ 0 -45
Stop Level(dBm) -80 ~ 0 -50
Step Level(dBm) 0.01 ~ 80 0.10
BER Spec(%) 0 ~ 100 0.10
Bytes to Test 1 ~ 500000 10000

55
3.5 Operation Procedure (Measurement/Measurement2)

3.5.3 Step 5. Setting Up Test Mode and Parameters

The Test Parameters let you configure Test mode, Bit pattern, Whitening, Hopping mode,
Packet Type, and Packet length. This menus can be accessed by pressing F8 in every
measurement screen.

Test Mode: You can choose Loopback or Transmitter or Null Packet. Null Packet mode is used to test DUTs
that have no test mode support. In this mode, the TC-3000C uses the packets without payloads and
measurements are not performed in accordance with the Bluetooth Test specification and some test cases
can’t be carried out. A NULL packet has no payload but can be used for power, initial frequency, and
spectrum without having to activate test mode.

Bit Pattern: Select the bit pattern being


transmitted. Supported patterns are 0000
0000, 11111111, 10101010, 11110000, and
PRBS9.

Whitening: Enable or disable whitening. In


transmitter test mode, the packets exchanged
between TC-3000C and DUT are not scrambled
with the whitening sequence. This parameter is
ignored in transmitter test mode.

Hopping Mode: Choose to make measurement on a specific channel or in Bluetooth frequency hopping
mode. The “Off” require specifying Tx and Rx channel.

Packet Type: Select a Bluetooth specific single or multi slot packet. The following packet types are
available: DM1, DH1, HV1, HV2, HV3, AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5, EV3, EV4, EV5, 2-DH1, 3-DH1, 2-
DH3, 3-DH3, 2-DH5, 3-DH5, 2-EV3, 3-EV3, 2-EV5, 3-EV5. For the transmitter test mode, only packets
without FEC should be used; i.e. HV3, DH1, DH3, DH5 and AUX1 packets.
Length: the length of packets can be adjusted from 1 to 27 for 1slot packets, 1 to 183 for 3 slot
packets and 1 to 339 for 5 slot packets.

56
3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement)

3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement)


This chapter describes the operation procedure of EDR Measurement.

When you select the EDR measurement screen or run the test cases, the TC-3000C
makes a connection to DUT that is discovered firstly and begins to test automatically
although there are several BT devices nearby. If you want to test a specific device in
several devices, go through the step 2 in the Link Analyzer screen or Host Analyzer screen
in advance.

If there is a connection with DUT already, the TC-3000C begins the test immediately
without preceding connection procedure.

“Basic Operation Procedure” on page 3-12 should be performed before following


NOTE steps.

3.6.1 Step 3. Selecting the EDR Measurement Screen

EDR Measurement can be accessed by pressing the Menu hard key. Press Menu
 Rotary Knob or    Select “EDR Measurement” from the pop-up menu on the
screen  ENT

When you select the measurement screen, the TC-3000C makes a connection to DUT that
is discovered firstly and begins to measure RF signals automatically.

57
3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement)

3.6.2 Step 4. Measuring EDR Characteristics of DUT

1. Constellation : To access the constellation, press M1 soft key. This screen shows
the I-Q constellation spectrum of a channel in single channel or hopping mode.

RMS DEVM: Variance of DEVM(Differential


Error Vector Magnitude)
Peak DEVM: maximum DEVM
Freq. Offset: carrier frequency offset of PSK
payload
Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests
will run once. When pressed again while the
tests are running, the testing will stop.

Num of symbol : Number of PSK symbols


displayed on screen, To see more symbol,
increase this value

Pointer : Graphical size of symbol

Symbol start : Specifies the start point to


display PSK symbol. “0” means the start point of
PSK Payload

Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test


Transmitted PSK symbol
Mode connection with DUT
from DUT

Parameters Range Default


Max of X-axis 1~ 50000 5000
Max. Of X-axis 1 ~ 50000 5000
Num of symbol 1 ~ 200 100
Pointer Small, Mid, Large Mid
Symbol start 0

58
3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement)

2. TX-BER (Bit Error Rate): To access TX-BER screen, press M2 soft key. The
purpose of this measurement is to test DUT’s PSK modulation quality. This test is not the
DUT’s RX sensitivity so output power of TC-3000C should be set enough high. This
screen shows the TX-BER measurements that are carried out by checking data in PSK
payload fields received from the DUT. This test is performed in Transmitter test mode
only.

BER: Displays the TX-BER measure to


the sent bytes that are specified in
“Length” menu.
PER: Displays the TX-PER(Packet
Error Rate) measure

Num. Of packet: specifies the number of packet


to measure

Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test


Mode connection with DUT

59
3.6 Operation Procedure (EDR Measurement)

3. DEVM : To access DEVM screen, press M3 soft key. This screen shows the DEVM
according to PSK payload position. X-axis means position of PSK payload.

Top Line : Specifies the amplitude of top line

Bottom Line : Specifies the amplitude of


Bottom line

Num of symbol : Number of PSK symbols


displayed on screen, To see more symbol,
increase this value
Symbol start : Specifies the start point to
display PSK symbol. “0” means the start point of
PSK Payload

Test mode: Configures Bluetooth Test Mode


connection with the DUT

Parameters Range Default


Top Line 0.9 ~ 100 1.00
Bottom Line 0 ~ 0.1 0.00
Num of symbol 1 ~ 200 100
Symbol start 0 ~ 145 0

60
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

3.7.1 Step 2. Creating Connection to DUT

1. Selecting the Audio Screen: Audio screen can be accessed by pressing the Menu
hard key. Press Menu  Rotary Knob or    Select “Audio” from the pop-up
menu on the screen  Press ENT .

Discover: Searches for all Bluetooth


devices that are in range and in
Inquiry Scan Mode through the Inquiry
Show Devices Found: This procedure.
window display details about the
found devices. Connect/Disconnect: Creating connection to
highlighted DUT on the screen through the Page
procedure or disconnecting. This menu is
displayed when a DUT is discovered and listed on
the screen. If the highlighted DUT is connected,
this menu is changed to “Disconnect”.

SCO connect: Create SCO connection


to a highlighted DUT on the screen.

SCO loopback: Enables the SCO


loopback test.

Pairable: Enables the TC-3000C to be


responder in pairing procedure.

Change submenus: For setting Reset: Resets the TC-3000C. In case


up Inquiry, Page, and test mode DUT is connected to the TC-3000C with
parameters. HCI, the DUT is reset simultaneously.

61
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

2. Setting up the profile type of DUT: You should define the profile type of DUT, before
beginning tests. To select the profile type, press F8 two times for “More 3/3” menu
in the Audio screen. press F2 and select the profile type of DUT.
3. Setting up the parameters for DUT: Specify the parameters related to Signal Source.
Press F8 for “More 2/3 or 3/3” menu  press F2 ~ F4 key.
4. Search for DUT: Press F8 for “More 1/3” menu  press F2 key to search for
all Bluetooth devices that are in range and in Inquiry Scan Mode through the Inquiry
procedure. If the DUT is connected to the TC-3000C through the HCI port, the TC-
3000C read the Bluetooth device (BD) address and controls the DUT directly through
HCI. If you want to stop Inquiry process, press
F2 key again.
5. Select a DUT: Select a DUT that you want to test in the found devices by using
Rotary Knob or 
 keys.
6. Connect/Disconnect: Create connection to highlighted DUT on the screen through
the Page procedure by pressing F3 . When the highlighted DUT is connected, this
menu changes to “Disconnect”. To make a SCO connection, press F4 .

Selecting Audio Gate as the profile type causes “Talk” menu to be showed
and "Discover” menu to disappear. In case of Audio Gate (HS-AG or HF-AG),
TC-3000C discovers DUT and creates ACL / SCO connection at in a time by
NOTE
pressing F2 (Talk).

[ Voice Parameters ]

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


Packet Type HV1, HV2, HV3 HV3 Defines the packet type of SCO Link

Air Coding CVSD, u-law, A-law CVSD Defines voice coding type
Defines the delay time that TC-3000C
Delay (s) 0, 2, 5 2 loopback the SCO Data received from
DUT.

62
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

[ Profile Parameters ]

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


None
Headset
Hands free
Type of Profiles
Type of Profile HS-AG Hands free
Defines the profile type of DUT
HF-AG
Audio-SNK
Audio-SRC

When it is “checked” TC-3000C transmits


Send Ring Unchecked
RING with AT command.

If the DUT support the microphone and


speaker gain controls, checking this option
enable TC-3000C to control the volume of
Gain control Unchecked
it. Checking this menu causes “Speaker
Volume” and “Mic Volume” menu to be
showed below.
Speaker Volume
Speaker Volume 0 ~ 15 15
Specifies the volume of DUT speaker.

Microphone Volume
Mic Volume 0 ~ 15 15
Specifies the volume of DUT microphone .

Built-in Select to transmit the internal audio tone


Transfer Type Built-in
User File or the external source which user saved.
Copy an audio source file from USB
Memory to TC-3000C. The name of file
Copy Source
must be “tc3000.sbc” and only a file can
be saved.
16000
32000 The sample frequency of the audio source
Sample Frequency 32000
44100 (SBC)
48000

Subbands 4, 8 8 The Subband of the audio source (SBC)

Bitpool 2 ~ 250 32 The Bitpool of the audio source (SBC)

3.7.2 Step 3. Verification of Speech Loopback for Mono Headset

Pressing F5 enable TC-3000C to SCO loopback mode. In this test, TC-3000C loopback
all SCO Data received from DUT. You can listen to your voice from Headset speaker
after the delay time specified and verify the performance (howling, echo, noise) of
microphone and speaker simply.

To stop the SCO loopback, press F5 again.

63
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

Time Delay: You can specify Speaker


this value in the Delay (s) menu.
Press F8 for “More 2/3”
menu  Press F4 .

Audio Path Micro Phone

3.7.3 Step 4. Measuring Audio Characteristics of DUT

1. Audio Test: The following parameters are displayed in the Audio Test screen during
the test: Audio Frequency, Fundamental Power, RMS, SINAD, ICF (Initial Carrier
Frequency Tolerance) and Distortion.

[Typical Mono Headset test configuration]


TC-3000C sends an internally generated 1 kHz or 400 Hz tone to Headset speaker as a
diagram below. The tone signal is transmitted from the speaker to the microphone through
a sound tube. (In case of mobile phone, it is transmitted via internal audio path between
the speaker and the microphone). The TC-3000C receives the tone signal from DUT and
the audio spectrum and distortion of the signal are computed. To access the Audio Test
screen, press M2 soft key.

Send 1 kHz or 400 Hz tone to DUT Speaker

Send the 1 kHz or 400Hz tone


received from the Sound Tube to TC-

Audio Path 3000C.


Sound Tube

[Typical Stereo Headset test configuration]


TC-3000C sends an internally generated 1 kHz and 400 Hz tone to left and right of
Headset speaker as a diagram below. The tone signal is transmitted from the speaker to
the Base Band IN 1 or 2 port of TC-3000C through the audio cable connected to the
microphone. The TC-3000C receives the tone signal from DUT and the audio spectrum
and distortion of the signal are computed. To access the Audio Test screen, press M2
soft key. Before starting the test, .press M2  F8 “More 2/2”  F4 and make
sure if “Audio Inport” is set correctly.

64
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

. Send 1 kHz (Left) and 400 Hz (Right) tone to DUT Speaker

RF Port

Send the audio tone from the speaker to


BB IN 1 or 2 by using a microphone.

Audio Path Microphone

BB IN 1 or 2

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests


will run once. When the menu is pressed again
while the tests are running, the tests will stop.

Tone Freq (Hz): Defines the tone frequency


for the test.

Tone level (dBm0): Specifies the power


of the TX audio signal.

DUT RX level: Specifies the DUT RX level.


TC-3000C controls the TX level for DUT to
receive the level specified in consideration of
the Path Loss.

Reset: Clears all values


Measurement Window:
 BD_ADDR: Bluetooth Address of DUT
 Name: The friendly name of DUT
 Frequency: The frequency of fundamental waveform
 F. Power: The magnitude of fundamental waveform
 RMS: the RMS magnitude of the signal
 SINAD: This is a way that expresses total harmonic distortion plus noise. It is the RMS magnitude of the
signal divided by the RMS magnitude of the difference between the signal and the fundamental. This
measurement is expressed only in dB.
 Distortion: Total harmonic distortion (THD) plus noise.

65
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

Parameters Range Default


Tone Freq (Hz) 1000, 400 1000
Tone level (dBm0) -70 ~ 3 -10
CH1 Freq(Hz) 20~20000 1000
CH2 Freq(Hz) 20~20000 400
CH1 level(dBm0) -70~3 -3
CH2 level(dBm0) -70~3 -3
DUT RX level -80 ~ 0 -30.00
Channel(3) 0-39-78
Meas.Mode Continuous, Single Continuous
Audio In (Hz) 1000, 400 1000
Audio Inport Port1(BB IN1), Port2(BB IN2) Port1(BB IN1)
Num of Avg 1 ~ 100 1
Lower Freq(Hz) 20~4000 200
Upper Freq(Hz) 20~4000 3500

66
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

2. Audio Spectrum: TC-3000C has the ability to analyze the frequency spectrum of an
audio signal. You can measure frequency, amplitude, and harmonics of the audio signal in
this screen. The frequency range of spectrum is from 0 Hz to 4 kHz (sampling frequency =
8 kHz). To access Audio spectrum screen, press M3 soft key.

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests will run


once. When pressed again while the tests are running, the
testing will stop. Tone Freq (Hz): Defines the tone frequency
for the test.

Tone level (dBm0): Specifies the power


of the TX audio signal.

dBm0/div: Sets the vertical amplitude per


division.

Ref. Level: Specifies the amplitude reference


level. The top line of the display is the
reference level. All signals displayed are
reference to this line.

Number of Average: Measurement Averaging.


The signal averaging improves the signal to noise
ratio. The noise, i.e., the measurement error,
decreases by 1/SQRT(N) for N averages, but the
measurement time increases by N times.
Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the Increasing averaging will reduce the measurement
screen to find the signal’s frequency and time. To activate fluctuation.
a maker, press the Marker key in sequence. An
activated marker changes to a solid line. Turn the knob to DUT RX level: Specifies the DUT RX level.
place the marker at the signal. TC-3000C controls the TX level in
consideration of the Path Loss so that the
Readouts of markers Frequency and Level: The
DUT can receive the level specified
marker readouts have the same color as the marker
respectively.

Parameters Range Default


Tone Freq (Hz) 1000, 400 1000
Tone level (dBm0) -70 ~ 3 -10
dBm0/div 1 ~ 20 10
Ref. Level (dBm0) -80 ~ 40 0
Num of Avg 1 ~ 100 1
DUT RX level -80 ~ 0 -30.00

67
3.7 Operation Procedure (Audio Analyzer)

3. Audio Sweep: TC-3000C’s internal audio tone source can be set to sweep up to 3900
Hz (minimum 100 Hz step) and then return the distortion and RMS volts for each
frequency. Sweep results are displayed on the screen To access Audio spectrum screen,
press M4 soft key.

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests will run Start Freq (Hz): Specifies the start
once. When pressed again while the tests are running, frequency to sweep.
Stop Freq (Hz): Specifies the stop
the testing will stop.
frequency to sweep.

Step Freq (Hz): Specifies the frequency step


to sweep.

Tone level (dBm0): Specifies the power of


the TX audio signal.
Ref. Level: Specifies the amplitude reference
level. The top line of the display is the
reference level. All signals displayed are
reference to this line.
dB/Div: Sets the vertical amplitude per
division
Line Markers: You can place line-shaped markers on the Number of Average: Measurement Averaging.
screen to find the signal’s frequency and time. To activate The signal averaging improves the signal to noise
a maker, press the Marker key in sequence. An ratio. The noise, i.e., the measurement error,
activated marker changes to a solid line. Turn the knob to decreases by 1/SQRT(N) for N averages, but the
place the marker at the signal. measurement time increases by N times.
Increasing averaging will reduce the measurement
Readouts of markers RMS, Distortion, and
fluctuation.
frequency: The marker readouts have the same
color as the marker respectively. Measurement Delay: Specifies the source
delay time (the time between setting the source
and taking the measurement) in milliseconds.

Parameters Range Default


Start Freq (Hz) 30 ~ 3900 300
Stop Freq (Hz) 30 ~ 3900 3300
Step Freq (Hz) 15 ~ 3870 100
Tone level (dBm0) -70 ~ 3 -10
Ref. Level (dBm0) -80 ~ 40 0
dB/Div 0.1 ~ 20 10
Num of Avg 1 ~ 100 1
Meas Delay (ms) 30 ~ 1000 100

68
3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test)

3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test)


This chapter describes the operation procedure of Bluetooth Conformance Test. You can test
BT device with only a single keystroke. When the Start key is pressed, the TC-3000C
instates a link, activates Test Mode, performs the measurements and reports the results with
batch processing. Under the Test Mode (Transmitter or Loop back), tests are made exactly
as defined in the Bluetooth Test Specification. The tables below represent the supported test
cases.

Category TC identifier Description Test Mode

TRM/CA/01/C Output power TX, Loopback, Null packet

TRM/CA/02/C Power Density TX, Loopback, Null packet

TRM/CA/03/C Power Control TX, Loopback, Null packet

TRM/CA/04/C TX Output Spectrum – Frequency range TX, Loopback, Null packet


RF
TRM/CA/05/C TX Output Spectrum – 20dB Bandwidth TX, Loopback, Null packet
(Transmitter)
TRM/CA/06/C TX Output Spectrum – Adjacent channel power TX, Loopback

TRM/CA/07/C Modulation Characteristics TX, Loopback

TRM/CA/08/C Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance TX, Loopback, Null packet

TRM/CA/09/C Carrier Frequency Drift TX, Loopback

RCV/CA/01/C Sensitivity – Single slot packets Loopback

RCV/CA/02/C Sensitivity – Multi-slot packets Loopback


RF
(Receiver)
RCV/CA/06/C Maximum Input Level Loopback

BER + FER

Quick (OP+MOD+ICFT+CFD)

TRM-LE/CA/01/C Output power

TRM-LE/CA/03/C In-Band Emissions

TRM-LE/CA/05/C Modulation Characteristics

TRM-LE/CA/06/C Carrier Frequency Offset and Drift


BT LE
RCV-LE/CA/01/C Receiver Sensitivity

RCV-LE/CA/06/C Maximum Input Signal Level

RCV-LE/CA/07/C PER Report integrity

Quick (OP+MOD+CFOD)

TRM/CA/10/C EDR Relative Transmit Power TX, Loopback


EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
EDR TRM/CA/11/C TX, Loopback
Accuracy
(Enhanced
Data Rate) TRM/CA/12/C EDR Differential Phase Encoding TX

TRM/CA/13/C EDR In-band Spurious Emissions TX, Loopback

69
3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test)

RCV/CA/07/C EDR Sensitivity Loopback

RCV/CA/08/C EDR BER Floor Performance Loopback

RCV/CA/09//C EDR Maximum Input Level Loopback

Combined Test Case for “Quick Test”

To reduce test time, TC-3000C combine several test cases into one menu. In this Test Case,
all default values of parameters are optimized in consideration of the test time. You can
perform four Test Cases (Output Power, Modulation Characteristics, Initial Carrier Frequency
Tolerance, and Carrier Frequency Drift) at once.

Combined Test Case: Output


Power, Modulation Characteristics,
Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance,
and Carrier Frequency Drift are
combined in this menu.

“Basic Operation Procedure” on page 3-12 should be performed before following


steps.
NOTE

70
3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test)

3.8.1 Step 3. Selecting the Test Cases Screen

Test Cases screen can be accessed by pressing the Menu hard key. Press Menu
 Rotary Knob or    Select “Test Cases” from the pop-up menu on the screen
 ENT . Test cases and parameters can be accessed by using Rotary Knob or 
 keys.

Test Case: To select test Check Box: Indicates if Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the tests
cases, use Rotary Knob a test case is selected will run once. When pressed again while the
or   keys or not. tests are running, the testing will stop.

Edit: When this menu is pressed, you can edit


the various parameters of a highlighted test
case.
Select All: Selects all test case
Clear All: Clear all test case

Result: Shows the test result of a highlighted


test case.

Report: Shows the report that record test


results and logs from the latest clearing to now.

Copy Report: Copies test cases report to


diskette
Auto detach: Disconnect DUT after tests are
Parameters: This parameters is
done automatically.
displayed when Edit is pressed.
The changing parameter turns the
text color red.
Status window: Indicates status of test case as follows:
“Run…”: Running the test.
“PASSED”: Pass this test case for test limits set.
“FAILED”: Fail this test case for test limits set.
“Not yet”: Test is not completed.

3.8.2 Step 4. Selecting the Test Cases and Setting Up Test Parameters

Selecting test case:


1) Press soft key ( M1 ~ M5 ) related to a test case screen.
2) Move the box-shaped cursor to a test case that you want to perform using Rotary Knob
or   keys.
3) Press Rotary knob or ENT key and confirm that the check box related to the test
case is checked.
4) To unselect test case, press Rotary knob or ENT key again.

71
3.8 Operation Procedure (Bluetooth Conformance Test)

Changing test parameters:


1) Move the box-shaped cursor to a test case that you want to change test parameters
using Rotary Knob or   keys.
2) Press F2 soft key to expand parameter menus.
3) Move the box-shaped cursor to a parameter using Rotary Knob or   keys.
4) Push Rotary knob for data input mode. The input cursor indicates data input position or
a drop down menu is driven.
5) Enter the value using keypad or choose the new setting from the drop down menu.
6) Press ENT key.
7) BS key can be used, if necessary during keypad entry.

To apply the changed values to test, “Use Default” must be unchecked. If


“Use Default” is selected, all of displayed values are ignored and the default
NOTE values will be assigned automatically.

3.8.3 Step 5. Running the Test Cases and Viewing the Test Results

Pass or fail in results are displayed on the status window related to the test case as soon
as tests are finished. The details of measurement can be shown by two methods,
pressing Result or Report . While the Result screen shows the measures of each test
case, the Report screen displays the measures of all test case performed and test logs
(test conditions, test time, and so on) in a screen. The test report can be copy to 3.5”
diskette by pressing F7 soft key.

Test Result screen:


1) Move the box-shaped cursor to a test case that you want to see results using Rotary
Knob.
2) Press F5 soft key ( Result ), to display the pop-up screen including test results as
below.

Test Report screen:


Press F6 soft key ( Report ), to display the report screen. The report format and mode
can be changed in the Test Configuration screen. (Press Menu  Select
“Configuration” from the pop-up menu on the screen  M1 (Tester)  Press F6 or
F7 .

72
3.9 Setting up for Bluetooth LE(Low Energy) Testing

Parameters Option Description


txt Text
Report Format
csv Coma Separate Value

Overwrite Overwrite the existing report

Append a new report to the end of existing one. The


Report Mode buffer size is 10M bytes. Some warning messages are
Append appeared continuously after the report size is over 1M
bytes. In this case, you should define whether save it to
a diskette or not.

PgUp (M1): Page UP


PgDn (M2): Page Down
Home (M3): Go to the home of report
End (M4): Go to the end of report
Reset (M5): Clears the screen
Close (MENU): Closes the screen

Copy the test report to diskette:


1) Insert an USB Memory into USB port on the front panel.
2) Press F7 soft key ( “Copy Report” ).
3) Follow the instruction of the pop-up message.

Refer to Appendix 2, “RF Test Cases” for details.


NOTE

3.9 Setting up for Bluetooth LE(Low Energy) Testing


This chapter describes how to set up TC-3000C for Bluetooth LE (Low Energy) Testing. The
3000-50 option should be purchased for BT LE Testing. 3000-20 option should be ordered
together if RF measurement is necessary
You can start BT LE testing by setting the DUT type as “BT LE” in the DUT configuration. All

73
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

method on how to access test screens and set up parameters are same as General Bluetooth
DUT testing.

1) Press MENU key and select the configuration screen.


2) Press M2 (DUT)  F2 (DUT Type) .
3) Select “BT LE” from the list.
4) Press MENU key and select a test screen.

DUT Type: Select BT LE

3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C


The TC-3000C is configured in the Configuration function accessed by pressing MENU key.
The configuration screens are used to configure the DUT, the TC-3000C and RF conditions.
The table below represents the configuration parameters for DUT and TC-3000C.

3.10.1 Tester

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


Timeout of HCI commands execution
Defines a period of time when a Host will wait events from
a Host controller after sending a command. It normally
HCI TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 2000
doesn’t need any modification. If DUT, however, has slow
HCI port then increase the value as much as it is
necessary.

SupervisionTO (s) 1~20 2 Link Supervision Timeout – used for monitoring of link loss

Modulation Index 0.28~0.35 0.32 Modulation Index is the index of FSK modulation
Passive Defines whether to activate DUT before starting
Link before Meas Active
Active measurement or not
Report Format txt or csv txt Defines the format of Test Cases report file; [txt] or [csv]

74
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

Append Defines the save-mode of Test Cases report file; [Append]


Report Mode Append
Overwrite or [Overwrite]
Bluetooth Device Address of the tester’s Host Controller
BD_ADDR - 9abc56781234 Must be entered in little ending format (LSB in the right
side) in hexadecimal notation.

Lower Address Part (3 bytes) of BD_ADDR, from which


9e8b00 ~
LAP for IAC 9e8b33 the Inquiry Access Code will be derived when the inquiry
9e8b3f
procedure is performed; 9e8b33 is GIAC

Inquiry Scan Interval


Defines the amount of time between consecutive inquiry
T inqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 scans, i.e., the time interval from the time when the Host
Controller starts its last inquiry scan to the time when it
begins the next inquiry scan.
Inquiry Scan Window
Defines the amount of time for the duration of the inquiry
T winqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 512
scan, and T winqscan must be less than or equal to the T
inqscan.
Inquiry Timeout
Inq. TO (1.28s) 1 ~ 48 48 Defines the maximum amount of time specified before the
Inquiry is halted.
Defines the maximum number of responses from the
# Inq. Responses 0 ~ 16 1 Inquiry before the Inquiry is halted; 0 means unlimited
number of responses
Page Scan Interval
Defines the amount of time between consecutive page
T pagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 scans, i.e., the time interval from the time when the Host
Controller starts its last page scan to the time when it
begins the next page scan.

Page Scan window


Defines the amount of time for the duration of the page
T wpagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 512
scan, and T wpagescan must be less than or equal to the
T pagescan.

Page Timeout
Defines the maximum time the local Link Manager will wait
for a Baseband page response from the remote device at
Page TO (slts) 1 ~ 65535 16000 a locally initiated connection attempt.
If this time expires and the remote device has not
responded to the page at baseband level, the connection
attempt will be considered as failure.
Variable
PIN Type Variable Defines the type of PIN to be used
Fixed

PIN Length 0~16 bytes 4 Defines the length of the PIN code (in bytes)
Defines the PIN code for the device to be connected; each
PIN Code 30.30.30.30 byte should be separated by a point. For example, if the
PIN Code is “1234”, type 31,32,33,34

L2CAP Timeout
L2CAP TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 30000
Defines the timeout of L2CAP commands execution

RFCOMM Timeout
RFCOMM TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 30000
Defines the timeout of RFCOMM commands execution

75
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

SDP Timeout
SDP TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 30000
Defines the timeout of SDP commands execution

Profile Timeout
Profile TO (ms) 1 ~ 65535 30000
Defines the timeout of Profile commands execution

This option will cause the TC-3000C to skip the pairing


Skip Pairing Unchecked process with DUT. To skip pairing, Link Key should be
entered.

Link Key Specifies Link Keys

Defines AFH (Adapted Frequency Hopping) enabled.


Enable
AFH Disable Enabling this option causes the “Select Channel” menu to
Disable
display below.

Select Channel Selects the AFH channels

Enable
Encryption Enable Defines Encryption enabled in the Tester’s LMP features.
Disable

Defines whether to read DUT’s name after inquiry


Name Discovery Checked procedure. (When the DUT use Broadcom chip, it is highly
recommended that this parameter is unchecked.

To test CSR Head Set 1.2, check this option. Enabling this
CSR HS1.2 Unchecked option causes the TC-3000C to skip encryption before
activating test mode.

Friendly Name is used for easy understandable name (ex


“TC-3000C”) of the device instead of Bluetooth device
Friendly Name
address (ex “9ABC56781234”). It could be edited any
name.

Initiate In case of Checked, the Tester will request Authentication


Unchecked
Authentication procedure from the DUT.

Time delay between Test mode setting using LMP


Delay for TC 1 ~ 65535 ms
message and real measurement in Test case

When you send a message about the control to the DUT


in the TC-3000C, you can set whether or not to use the
Pause test Unchecked ‘PAUSE’ between the message and the message. In case
of Checked, Pause between the message and the
message.

BCM20780 Unchecked Check if you want to test ‘BCM 20780’ chip of ‘Broadcom’

76
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

3.10.2 DUT

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


General Type of DUT
DUT Type BT BT To perform general RF measurements, select
BT Le General.
None
USB1 Type of HCI port
USB2 If DUT has HCI port, select the type of it. Otherwise
RS1 select None. If UART selected, determine the Baud
RS2 Rate.
HCI Port UART1 If DUT is plugged into HCI port of TC-3000C in
UART2 Preparation, the type of port will be automatically
BCSP1 selected.
BCSP2 This parameter MUST NOT be the same as HCI port
2WIRE1 setting of Tester.
2WIRE2
Defines whether to stop the Test Cases when an error
error stop TC - Checked
occurs during execution
Defines the number of attempts to recover the link lost
Num. of recover 0 ~ 10 0
while Test Cases are running

Defines the amount of the power loss in the full path


Path Loss (dB) 0 ~ 80 0
between Tester and DUT (in dB)
Flag indicating whether the DUT supports inquiry
When Bluetooth devices want to make a connection
between them, they take two steps: Inquiry and Page.
Master (Tester) gets the BD_ADDR of slave (DUT) in
Inquiry procedure and then uses it in Page procedure.
Inq. supported - Checked If you want to test according to the above two
procedures, let this box checked. But if you already
know BD_ADDR of DUT, uncheck this box and write
down parts of BD_ADDR of DUT in LAP for DAC.
Then it will start from Page.

Lower Address Part (3 bytes) of BD_ADDR, from


9e8b00 ~
LAP for IAC 9e8b33 which the Inquiry Access Code will be derived when
9e8b3f
the inquiry procedure is performed; 9e8b33 is GIAC
Inquiry Scan Interval
Defines the amount of time between consecutive
T inqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 inquiry scans, i.e., the time interval from the time
when the Host Controller starts its last inquiry scan to
the time when it begins the next inquiry scan.
Inquiry Scan Window
Defines the amount of time for the duration of the
T winqscan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18
inquiry scan, and T winqscan must be less than or
equal to the T inqscan.
Inquiry Timeout
Inq. TO (1.28s) 1 ~ 48 48 Defines the maximum amount of time specified before
the Inquiry is halted.

Defines the maximum number of responses from the


# Inq. Responses 0 ~ 16 1 Inquiry before the Inquiry is halted; 0 means unlimited
number of responses

77
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

Bluetooth Device Address of the DUT


Must be entered in little ending format (LSB in the
right side) in hexadecimal notation.
BD_ADDR - 0 6 bytes Bluetooth Device Address of the DUT, from
which the Device Access Code will be derived when
the page procedure is performed; the parameter is
used only when ‘Inq. supported’ is not checked

Page Scan Interval


Defines the amount of time between consecutive page
T pagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 2048 scans, i.e., the time interval from the time when the
Host Controller starts its last page scan to the time
when it begins the next page scan.

Page Scan window


Defines the amount of time for the duration of the
T wpagescan (slts) 18 ~ 4096 18
page scan, and T wpagescan must be less than or
equal to the T pagescan.
Page Timeout
Defines the maximum time the local Link Manager will
wait for a baseband page response from the remote
Page TO (slts) 1 ~ 65535 16000 device at a locally initiated connection attempt.
If this time expires and the remote device has not
responded to the page at baseband level, the
connection attempt will be considered as failure.

Power setting time of DUT


Pow. SetTime (ms) 1 ~ 65535 1000 Defines the interval of time Tester must wait until the
DUT will reach the new power step.

Defines whether LMP connection should be created


Conn. for Test Checked
before activating DUT’s test mode
NULL Pkt
Defines the test mode to be used in activating DUT’s
Test Mode Transmitter Loopback
test mode; NULL pkt means simple connection
Loopback
0000 0000
Bit pattern of payload
1111 1111
PRBS : Pseudo Random Binary Sequence
Bit Pattern 1010 1010 10101010
Defines the bit pattern of a payload to be used in the
1111 0000
test mode
PRBS9
Enable/Disable of Whitening
Disable
Whitening Disable Defines whether to scramble the packets with the
Enable
whitening sequence or not in the loopback test mode
OFF Defines whether to use 79 hopping sequence or not in
ON
Hopping Mode tx:0 the test mode; for ‘Off’, select the TX and RX
OFF
rx:0 channels respectively

78
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

DM1, DH1
HV1, HV2
HV3, AUX1
DM3, DH3
DM5, DH5
EV3, EV4
Packet Type 2-DM1
EV5, 2-DH1
3-DH1, 2-DH3
3-DH3, 2-DH5
3-DH5, 2-EV3
3-EV3, 2-EV5
3-EV5 Defines the type of packet to be used in the test mode
Defines the length of a payload to be used in the test
Length (bytes) 0 ~ MAX MAX mode (in bytes). MAX is changed according to Packet
Type

3.10.3 RF Settings

Parameters Range Default Descriptions

Defines TX power of the Tester. Prohibited to change if


TX Power (dBm) -80 ~ 0 0
any ACL link exists

Defines the setting of the RX attenuator of the Tester;


On
RX Attenuator Off The dynamic range of Tester’s receiver is –80 ~ -10
Off
dBm for ‘On’, but –30 ~ +20 dBm for ‘Off’

On Automatic Gain Control Setting of Tester Controls IF


AGC On
Off power level inside Tester’s receiver.

Defines the input range of the Tester’s receive available


RX Power (dBm) 10 ~ 70 -
only in case AGC is Off

Int Defines whether 10MHz Reference Oscillator is internal


10MHz Ref. Int
Ext or external

3.10.4 Peripherals

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


I-RX, Q-RX,
I-TX, Q-TX, Defines the signal going out through the
RX bit, RX clk BASEBAND OUT port 1 on the front panel. During
TX bit, TX clk operation, you can see the Baseband signals by
Ext Outport 1 FSK Demod
FSK Demod, connecting to oscilloscope.
FSK Mod, If you want to make a connection through
RX Mag, Baseband, not RF, select what you want.
Audio, Loop Back

79
3.10 Configuration of the TC-3000C

Defines the signal going out through the


Ext Outport 2 See Ext Outport 1 FSK Mod
BASEBAND OUT port 2 on the front panel

Defines the signal coming in through the


BASEBAND IN ports 1 and 2 on the front panel. By
1:Off 2:Off 1:Off default, it must be “1:Off 2:Off” if you will connect
Ext Inports
1:I-TX 2:Q-TX 2:Off through RF.
If you want to make a connection through
Baseband, not RF, select what you want.

Dark Defines the color scheme to be used for Tester’s


Color Scheme Dark
B-W screen

Use mouse Unchecked Defines whether to use the mouse or not

Set Time Sets the date and time of the system

See the system information; Serial Number, Version,


System Info
Software Options.

3.10.5 Network

Parameters Range Default Descriptions


TC-3000 IP IP address of the Tester

Remote IP IP address of a remote PC

Netmask Subnet mask


Gateway Gateway

To enable the control from a remote PC, check this box and
Remote Ctrl Unchecked
reboot Tester.
None
TC-3000C is equipped with two serial RS-232C interfaces.
Port RS1 RS1
The settings None, RS1, or RS2 are allowed.
RS2
TC-3000C allows baud rates between 2400 and 115200
Baudrate 115200
baud to be set.
Data transmission is in the 5, 6, 7, or 8 bit ASCII code,
Data bit 5,6,7,8 8
starting with the least significant bit (LSB).
None
A parity bit can be transmitted for error protection. The
Parity Odd None
settings No parity, even or odd parity are allowed.
Even
Transmission of a data byte is terminated by one or two
Stop Bit 1,2 1
stop bits.
None Define Flow Control. The settings None or RTSCTS
Flow Ctrl RTSCTS
RTSCTS (Request To Send, Clear To Send) are allowed.

Upgrade IP 64.33.6.108 IP address of FTP server for upgrading software.

Upgrade S/W Upgrades the software from USB Memory

80
3.11 General Purpose Communication Analyzer

3.11 General Purpose Communication Analyzer

3.11.1 Signal Generator

TC-3000C provides a general purpose RF source for ISM band receiver test.
Measurement can be accessed by pressing the Menu hard key. Press Menu 
Rotary Knob or  ,
  Select “SigGen” from the pop-up menu on the screen  ENT

Start/Stop: When this menu is pressed the


modulated signal will be transmitted. When the
menu is pressed again while the signal is
transmitting, the transmission will stop.

Frequency: Set Carrier frequency.


Range: 2.4 ~ 2.5 GHz

Power: Set RF output level.


Range: -80 ~ 0 dBm

Bit Pattern : Set FSK modulation Pattern


Range: 0 ~ 0×FFFFFFFF

FM Deviation: Set FM deviation.


Range: 0 ~ 1000 kHz

Parameters Range Default

Frequency 2.4~2.5 GHz 2.45 GHz

Power -80~0 dBm 0

Bit Pattern 0 ~ 0×FFFFFFFF 55555555

FM Deviation 0~1000 kHz 150

0 × 00000000 0 × FFFFFFFF 0 × 55555555 0 × F0F0F0F0

[Table 5] Pattern Example

81
3.11 General Purpose Communication Analyzer

3.11.2 Signal Analyzer

TC-3000C provides general purpose RF signal analyzer for ISM band transmitter test. In this
mode you can use Spectrum, FM Modulation and Power-Time screen in Measurement
function.

1) To set the TC-3000C to general test mode, press Menu  Select “Configuration”
from the pop-up menu on the screen  M2 (DUT)  press F1 (DUT Type) and
select “General” from the drop down lists.
2) To access “Measurement’’ function, press Menu  Select “Measurement” from the
pop-up menu on the screen  ENT
3) To access Spectrum, FM Modulation, or Power-Time screen, press M1 , M2 , or M3
key.

Operations are the same as the test screens in Bluetooth test mode except parameters
below.

 M1 (Spectrum)  F8  F2 (Detector): Allows you to select detector modes,


which include Peak or Average. Peak mode is good for seeing signals that are very
close to the noise floor. Average mode is the default mode.
 M1 (Spectrum)  F8  F3 (Sweep time (ms)): Specifies the 0.1 to 3.2 ms
Sweep time.
 Frequency: Specifies the 2.4 to 2.5 GHz frequency.

Spectrum
Parameters Range Default
Center 2.4~2.5 GHz 2.45
Span (MHz) 1, 1.25, 2, 2.5, 5, 10 10
Num of sweeps 1 ~ 50 1
Trace Mode Average / Maxhold Average
Ref. Level (dBm) -80 ~ 40 -80 + Path Loss ~ 40 + Path Loss
dB/Div 1 ~ 20 10
Detector Peak / Average Peak
Sweep Time (ms) 0.1~3.2 0.1

FM Modulation
Parameters Range Default
Frequency 2.4~2.5 GHz
Freq/Div (kHz) 10 ~ 1000 100
1 MHz Filter Checked
Start Time (us) -70 ~ 624 -15
Time(us)/Div 0.1 ~ 60 10

82
3.12 Store/Recall/Preset Instrument Settings

Power vs. Time


Parameters Range Default
Frequency 2.4~2.5 GHz
Ref. Level (dBm) -80 ~ 40 -80 + Path Loss ~ 40 + Path Loss
dB/Div 1 ~ 20 10
1 MHz Filter Checked
Time(us)/Div 0.1 ~ 60

3.12 Store/Recall/Preset Instrument Settings


The SAVE and Recall functions allow you to store different instrument setups and retrieve
them later. By saving test setups, you can save time by eliminating the task of re-configuring
the TC-3000C and DUT.
The Preset function restores the default settings (register number 8).

SAVE
1) Make any changes to the instrument that you want to SAVE in a register.
2) Press FCN + Recall .
3) Push Rotary Knob and select a register number (0 through 7).
4) Press the Knob or ENT key.

Recall
1) Press Recall key.
2) Push Rotary Knob and select a desired register number.
3) Press the Knob or ENT key.

Preset
1) Press FCN + INCR SET .
2) Select “Yes” and Press ENT key.

Refer to Appendix C “The list of Save/Recall parameters” for details


NOTE

3.13 Checking List for Common Problems

This section provides a brief check lists of common failures. Before troubleshooting or repairing the
TC-3000C, make sure the failure is in the instrument rather than any external connections. Also
make sure that the instrument is accurately calibrated.

83
3.13 Checking List for Common Problems

3.13.1 Unit is inoperative

1. Verify that the AC power cord is connected to the TC-3000C


Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into the power module on the rear
panel. You should also make sure that the power source you plugged the TC-3000C
into is energized.
2. Verify that the front-panel power switch is depressed.
Verify that the TC-3000C’s power switch is in the “I” position.
3. Verify line voltage.
The available line voltage is 100 ~ 240 VAC

3.13.2 Failure of testing

1. Check whether Host and Host Controller of TC-3000C is connected with USB
or RS-232C cable.
2. Check primary parameters:
- Configuration  DUT  HCI Port
- Configuration  DUT  Path Loss
- Configuration  Tester  PIN code
- Configuration  DUT  Test Mode
- Configuration  DUT  DUT Type

3. Check Level.
If the RF level is lower or higher than the receiver sensitivity allows, the DUT may
not respond.

4. Check if DUT is set to Inquiry/Page scan mode

84
Chapter

4
Performance Test

This section contains information for keeping the instrument in good working
order and checking its overall performance.

4.1 General Information


The procedures in this chapter allow the verification of the electrical performance of TC-
3000C. It contains procedures suitable for determining if TC-3000C functions, is adjusted
properly, and meets the performance characteristics as warranted. These tests do not
require access to the interior of the instrument.

The set-up drawings at the beginning of each test procedure show the test configuration
needed for each test. To perform the test procedures you need to know basic TC-3000C
operation. You should be familiar with the front panel, the various test screens, and knob
operation. The test procedures give critical instrument settings and connections, but they
don’t tell the manufacture test specification.
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.1.1 Recommended test equipment


Equipment required for the performance tests is listed in below table. Any equipment that
satisfies the critical specifications in the table may be substituted for the recommended
model.

The performance tests are based on the assumption that the recommended test
equipment is used. Substituting alternate test equipment may require modification of
some procedures.

Description Minimum specification Model


Power meter -20 to 27dBm, 100 kHz to 4 GHz HP-437B/8482A

Spectrum analyzer 100 kHz to 6.5 GHz, up to –120 dBm HP-8561E


Measuring receiver 0.15 to 1300 MHz, 0 to –130dBm, Freq Counter HP-8902A

Signal Generator 100 kHz ~ 1 GHz, +/- 0.5 dB, +20 ~ -120 dBm HP-8648C

Frequency Counter +/- 0.1 ppm, 10 Hz ~ 3 GHz, 9 digit HP-53181A

Sensor Module 50 ohm, 10 uW ~ 1W HP-11722A

Mixer VSWR <= 1.2, with 10 dB attenuator Mini-Circuits, JCIR-25

4.1.2 Calibration Cycle


This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. Depending on the use and
environmental conditions, the instrument should be checked using the following
performance tests at least once every year.

Unless otherwise noted, a warm-up period of 2 hours is required for these tests.
NOTE

86
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.1.3 TC-3000C Initial Set Up

Before perform the tests, TC-3000C should be initialized as follow procedure.


In the signal generator mode, the cable loss is ignored (Path Loss = 0).
NOTE

1) Power on
2) Allow 2 hour warm-up time for the TC-3000C
3) Press MENU key  Select “Configuration” from pop-up menu
4) Press M2 (DUT)
5) Press F2 (DUT Type)  Select “General” from pop-up menu
6) Press F7 (Path Loss)  Set “Path Loss” by the cable loss. (Typically, RG400
cable loss is 1dB/m)
7) Press M3 (RF Settings)
8) Press F4 (AGC)  Select “ON”
9) Press F3 (Rx Attenuator)  Select “30dB”

4.2 Signal Generator

4.2.1 Frequency Accuracy

Specification: 2496 MHz  1 ppm


Equipment: Frequency Counter, HP53181A
1. Test Setup : Connect equipment as shown in the figure below
TC-3000C

FREQUENCY COUNTER

RF INPUT

RF IN/OUT

[Figure 5] Carrier frequency accuracy test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows :


Set TC-3000C to “Signal Generator” mode. ( MENU  Select “SigGen”)
- Frequency: 2496 MHz
- Power: 0dBm
- Bit Patten: 0
- FM Deviation: 0
3. Press “Start” to begin the test and read the frequency from the frequency counter.

87
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.2.2 I/Q modulation calibration

Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer, HP8561E


1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below

TC-3000C

HP 8561E

INPUT 50 2450 MHz

[Figure 6] I/Q modulation calibration test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set TC-3000C to “Signal Generator” mode. ( MENU  Select “SigGen”)
- Power: 0dBm
- Bit Patten: 0
- FM Deviation:150 kHz

3. Set controls of Spectrum Analyzer as follows:


Span: 1 MHz
RBW: 10 kHz
VBW 210 kHz

4. Set TC-3000C output frequency according to the table below. At each setting,
press “Start” ( F1 ) to begin the test.
5. Record the level in the table for each setting. The limits for this frequency are
given in the table.

2400 MHz 2420 MHz 2440 MHz 2460 MHz 2480 MHz 2500 MHz
Fc
Spec. Spec. Spec. Spec. Spec. Spec.
Spectrum
Marker
<=- <=- <=- <=- <=- <=-
Fc-300kHz 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm
<=- <=- <=- <=- <=- <=-
Fc-150kHzt 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm
1>=, 1>=, 1>=, 1>=, 1>=,
Fc 1>=, >=-1
>=-1 >=-1 >=-1 >=-1 >=-1
<=- <=- <=- <=- <=- <=-
Fc+150kHz 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm
<=- <=- <=- <=- <=- <=-
Fc+300kHz 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm 31dBm

88
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.2.3 PLL phase noise

Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer, HP8561E


Specification: M1=0 dBm, M2 <= -60 dBm
1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below

TC-3000C

HP 8561E

INPUT 50 2450MHz

[Figure 7] PLL phase noise test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set TC-3000C to “Signal Generator” mode. ( MENU  Select “SigGen”)
- Frequency: 2450 MHz
- Power: 0dBm
- Bit Patten: 0
- FM Deviation: 0

3. Set controls of Spectrum Analyzer as follows:


Center Frequency: 2450 MHz
RBW: 30 kHz
VBW 3 kHz

4. Press “Start” ( F1 ) to begin the test.


5. Record the center frequency level (M1) on the spectrum analyzer.
6. Record the center frequency + 500KHz level (M2) on the spectrum analyzer.

89
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.2.4 FM accuracy

Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer, HP8561E


Signal Generator, HP 8648C
Mixer
Specification: 140 kHz ±10 kHz at rms FM demodulation. filter : 20 Hz ~ 200 kHz
1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below

TC-3000C

70MHz BPF

8902A 2450 MHz


IF R
LO
F
INPUT 50 10dB Attenuator
70 MHz IF
+13 dBm
HP 8648C

2380 MHz
RF OUTPUT

[Figure 8] FM accuracy test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set TC-3000C to “Signal Generator” mode. ( MENU  Select “SigGen”)
- Frequency: 2450 MHz
- Power: 0dBm
- Bit Patten: FFFF0000
- FM Deviation: 150

3. Press “Start” ( F1 ) to begin the test.


4. Record the FM demodulation on the HP8902.

90
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.2.5 Output level accuracy test

Equipment: Spectrum Analyzer, HP8561E


Signal Generator, HP 8648C
Mixer
Power Sensor
Specification: Power error <= ±1 dB

1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below


TC-3000C

8902A

70MHz BPF

Sensor 2450MHz
IF R
Module LO
F 10dB Attenuator
INPUT 50

sensor
70MHz IF POWER METER
+13dBm
HP 8648C

2380MHz
RF OUTPUT

[Figure 9] Output level accuracy test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set TC-3000C to “Signal Generator” mode. ( MENU  Select “SigGen”)
- Frequency: 2400 MHz
- Power: 0dBm
- Bit Patten: 0
- FM Deviation: 0

3. Connect the power sensor to TC-3000C


4. Set TC-3000C output frequency and level according to the table below. At each
setting, press “Start” ( F1 ) to begin the test.
5. Record the power in the table for each setting.

Frequency 2400 MHz 2420 MHz 2440 MHz 2460 MHz 2480 MHz 2500 MHz
Level
0 dBm

91
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

6. Remove the power sensor and connect the TC-3000C to the mixer.
7. Be sure that the measuring receiver is calibrated in Turned RF mode.
8.Set TC-3000C output frequency and level according to the table below. Set the RF
frequency of the HP 8648C to equal the TC-3000C output frequency minus 70MHz.
At all 0dBm level settings, set the readings on the HP 8902A to the ratio reference
for subsequent measurements by pressing “RATIO” key. At each setting, press
“Start” ( F1 ) on the TC-3000C to begin the test.
9. Record the power in the table for each setting.

Frequency 2400 MHz 2420 MHz 2440 MHz 2460 MHz 2480 MHz 2500 MHz
Level
0 dBm 0dBref 0dBref 0dBref 0dBref 0dBref 0dBref
-20 dBm
-40 dBm
-60 dBm
-80 dBm

4.3 Testing Receiver

4.3.1 Power measurement accuracy

Equipment: Signal Generator, HP8648C


Specification:
- Power measurement error : <= ±1.0 dB at +20 dBm ~ -30 dBm , RX Attenuator 0
dBm
- Power measurement error : <= ±1.0 dB at –10 dBm ~ -80 dBm , RX Attenuator 30
dBm

1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below


TC-3000C
HP 8648C

[Figure 10] Power measurement accuracy test

92
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Make sure “RX Attenuator” is 0 dB. ( MENU  Select “Configuration”  M3 
F3 )
Set TC-3000C to ”Pow-Time” screen mode. ( MENU  Select “Measurement” 
M3 )
- Ref. Level: 0dBm

3. Set Signal Generator output frequency and level according to the table below. At
each setting, set TC-3000C input frequency according to the signal generator output
frequency.

4. Record Pav (average power) in the table for each setting.

2400 MHz 2420 MHz 2440 MHz 2460 MHz 2480 MHz 2500 MHz
-10 dBm
-20 dBm
-30 dBm
-40 dBm
-50 dBm
-60 dBm
-70 dBm
-80 dBm

5. Change controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set “RX Attenuator” to 30 dB. ( MENU  Select “Configuration”  M3  F3 )
Set TC-3000C to ”Pow-Time” screen mode. ( MENU  Select “Measurement”  M3 )
- Ref. Level: 20 dBm

6. Set Signal Generator output frequency and level according to the table below. At
each setting, set TC-3000C input frequency according to the signal generator output
frequency.

7. Record Pav (average power) in the table for each setting.

2400 MHz 2420 MHz 2440 MHz 2460 MHz 2480 MHz 2500 MHz
+14 dBm
+10 dBm
0 dBm
-10 dBm
-20 dBm
-30 dBm
-40 dBm
-50 dBm

93
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.3.2 Maximum sensitivity

Specification: Maximum value <= -100 dBm @ resolution BW = 40 kHz

1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below

TC-3000C

50  Terminator

[Figure 11] Maximum sensitivity test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Make sure “RX Attenuator” is 0dB. ( MENU  Select “Configuration”  M3  F3 )
Set TC-3000C to ”Spectrum” screen mode. ( MENU  Select “Measurement” 
M1 )
- Frequency: 2450 MHz
- Ref. Level: -50 dBm
- Span: 10 MHz
- Num of sweeps: 50

3. Read the peak level on the screen.

94
2.6 Cleaning, Storage and Shipment

4.3.3 Gain Roll-off

Equipment: Signal Generator, HP8648C


1. Test Setup: Connect equipment as shown in the figure below

TC-3000C
HP 8648C

[Figure 12] Gain Roll-off test

2. Set controls of TC-3000C as follows:


Set TC-3000C to ”Pow-Time” screen mode. ( MENU  Select “Measurement” 
M3 )
- Frequency: 2450 MHz
- Ref. Level: 0 dBm
- 1.3 MHz Filter: OFF
- Time(us)/Div: 15
3. Set Signal Generator output level to –10 dBm
4. Set Signal Generator output frequency according to the table below. At each
setting, read Peak power on the TC-3000C and record the level in the table. The
limits for this frequency are given in the table.

SG output frequency Peak Power Specification


2445 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 4 dB
2446 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 4 dB
2447 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 1 dB
2448 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 1 dB
2449 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 1 dB
2450 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 1 dB
2451 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 1 dB
2452 MHz <=-10 dBm ± 1 dB
2453 MHz <=-10 dBm ± 1 dB
2454 MHz <=-10 dBm ± 4 dB
2455 MHz <= -10 dBm ± 4 dB

95
Chapter

5
Programming Guide

There are two major ways to control TC-3000C remotely. One is to use Dynamic Link Library
(DLL) file in order to make your own Bluetooth test application programs. The DLL provided by
TESCOM is used to communicate with TC-3000C through TCP/IP, USB, or RS-232C interface.
And it is independently supplied in accordance with firmware version of TC-3000C. Another is to
use RS-232C commands without any other additional file contrary to the DLL.
5.1 Introduction

5.1 Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to help you develop test applications of your Bluetooth product
in the test executive you intend to use. TC-3000C supports Ethernet(Host) / USB(Host
Controller) / RS-232C(Host, Host Controller) port located at the rear panel for remote
operation under PC control.

System Requirements: To develop test applications, your development platform should


meet the following requirement.
 Operating System: Microsoft Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP.
 Development Tool: Microsoft Visual C++.NET, Visual C++, Visual Basic, Boland C++
Bulider, National Instrument LabWindows/CVI, LabView, etc

Support scope: You can control following functions of TC-3000C.


 Test Configuration
 RF Test Case
 Measurement(DLL only)
 Audio Test

5.2 Getting Started


Take a closer look at two kinds of TC-3000C remote control method. One is to use Dynamic
Link Library (DLL). According to your need you can choose and use Ethernet(Host), USB(Host
Controller) or RS-232C(Host Controller) port. And you are able to call some functions of
DLL(“tc3k.dll”) for your testing goal. By the way, you have a trouble controlling two or more TC-
3000Cs in this case. That is why DLL containing Host program occupies most of CPU
resources of your PC like the following figures.

 Remote control diagram using Ethernet (Host)

TC-3000C Remote PC(User)

Host Controller Windows


Applition

Host
Call Functions

Linux
Application Host(DLL)
TCP/IP TCP/IP

97
5.2 Getting Started

 Remote control diagram using USB (Host Controller)

TC-3000C Remote PC(User)

Host Controller Windows


Applition

Call Functions
Host
Host(DLL)

Linux
Application USB Driver
USB USB
(Host Controller)

 Remote control diagram using RS-232C (Host Controller)

TC-3000C Remote PC(User)

Host Controller Windows


Applition

Host
Call Functions

Linux
Application Host(DLL)
RS-232C RS-232C
(Host Controller)

Another is to send RS-232C commands. At present, you can utilize the command through
only RS-232C(Host) port. In this case, you don’t have any limitation to control several TC-
3000Cs at the same time contrary to DLL.

 Remote control diagram using RS-232C (Host)

TC-3000C Remote PC(User)

Host Controller

Host

Linux Command/Response Windows


Application Applition
RS-232C RS-232C

In order to successfully perform the remote control, the following configuration settings need to be done.

98
5.2 Getting Started

5.2.1 Settings for Ethernet(Host) remote control using DLL

1. Setting up Netwok Parameters: Press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the pop-up
menu on the screen  M5 (Network)  Setting up Network Parameters
2. Enable Remote Control: Press F7 on the above screen to set Remote Ctrl to
“Checked”.
3. Reboot TC-3000C.
4. If you have the following screen, the setting has been done successfully.

LAN Remote Contorl Mode


i
Version : 1.16 04-09-22 Local IP of TC-3000C
Boot time : 08:28:38 10/29/2004
Local IP of user PC
Local_IP : 10.52.147.70
Remote_IP : 10.52.147.71

Quit
Quit With Switch to Normal Mode

5. Execute “PING” command on you PC so as to see if TC-3000C is operating and also to


see if network connections are intact.

Make sure the Local IP and Remote IP is correct on the above screen.
NOTE

6. Call the following functions in your application to make Ethernet remote control program
using DLL.
(1) write_tester_hci_tl(16); // TCP/IP : 16
(2) write_local_ip(“10.52.147.71”); // “Local IP” of user PC is “Remote IP” of TC-3000C.
(3) wirte_remote_ip(“10.52.147.70”); // “Remote IP” of user PC is “Local IP” of TC-3000C

5.2.2 Settings for USB(Host Controller) remote control using DLL

1. Copy following files to your system directory.


 Files required : tc_terter.sys, tc_tester.inf
 System Directory : C:/WINDOWS/system32(Windows XP)

2. Connect USB port of TC-3000C Host Controller with USB port of your PC, and then use
the “Found New Hardware Wizard”. Even If our driver has not passed Windows Logo
testing, Ignore it and push the “ContinueAnyway” button. Our driver will be installed
successfully.

3. Call the following functions in your application to make USB remote control program
using DLL.

99
5.2 Getting Started

(1) write_tester_hci_tl(1); // 1:USB


(2) write_tester_hc_port(0); // 0:USB1

5.2.3 Settings for RS-232C(Host Controller) remote control using DLL

1. The supplied RS-232C cable is used to connect RS-232C port of TC-3000C Host
Controller with serial port of user PC.
2. Turn on TC-3000C.

FAILED to autodetect connection to DSP


X Your choice :
- check cable, and click Retry,
- or, click Quit to shutdown
Retry Quit

3. Call the following functions in your application to make RS-232C remote control program
using DLL.
(1) write_tester_hci_tl(2); // 2: RS-232C
(2) write_tester_hc_port(0); // 0 : COM1

5.2.4 Settings for the RS-232C(Host) remote control without using DLL

1. Setting up RS-232C Parameters: Press Menu  Select “Configuration” from the pop-
up menu on the screen  M5 (Network)  F8 (More 1/3)  Setting up RS-232C
Parameters.
2. You can ascertain whether your RS-232C settings including cable connection state is
correct through Hyper Terminal on your PC.
3. If your RS-232C settings are right, the screen of TC-3000C will be changed as follows.

READ:SERIAL_NUM? Log hide


3000C2A0023
EXEC:RESET Local
OK Hide all commands and responses
PgUp

PgDn

Home

End
Change remote mode to local mode

100
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

5.2.5 Preparing for your application using DLL

1. Insert library Disk in a floppy disk drive of Remote Control Computer.


2. Copy following files to your application directory from the library Disk.

tc3k.dll, tc3k.lib, tester_dll.h, platform.h

You must use the library files correspond to TC-3000C version. When TC-3000C is
upgraded the library files should be changed with the new version files. You can
NOTE download the library files from Tescom website(www.tescom.co.kr).

5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands


5.3.1 Configuration Command

READ:SYS:TESTER:HCI_TO?
Description
This command reads the timeout of HCI commands execution in miliseconds.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:HCI_TO <Value>
Description
This command set the timeout of HCI commands execution in miliseconds.
Value
HCI Timeout : 1 ~ 65535, 2000(default)

If you set this to improper value so as to reduce timeout, you may have a trouble
measuring. Accordingly, be careful of a change of this value.
NOTE

READ:SYS:TESTER:L2CAP_TO?
Description
This command reads the timeout of L2CAP commands execution in milliseconds.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:L2CAP_TO <Value>
Description
This command set the timeout of L2CAP commands execution in milliseconds.
Value
L2CAP Timeout : 1 ~ 65535, 5000(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:RFCOMM_TO?
Description
This command reads the timeout of RFCOMM commands execution in milliseconds.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:RFCOMM_TO <Value>
Description

101
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command set the timeout of RFCOMM commands execution in milliseconds.


Value
RFComm Timeout : 1 ~ 65535, 5000(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:SDP_TO?
Description
This command reads the timeout of SDP commands execution in milliseconds.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:SDP_TO <Value>
Description
This command set the timeout of SDP commands execution in milliseconds.

Value
SDP Timeout : 1 ~ 65535, 5000(default)
READ:SYS:TESTER:PROFILE_TO?
Description
This command reads the timeout of PROFILE commands execution in milliseconds.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:PROFILE_TO <Value>
Description
This command set the timeout of PROFILE commands execution in milliseconds.

Value
Profile Timeout : 1 ~ 65535, 5000(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:FRIENDLY_NAME?
Description
This command reads the Friendly Name of the tester.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:FRIENDLY_NAME <Value>
Description
This command set the Friendly Name of the tester.

Value
Friendly Name : 54.43.2D.33.30.30.30.42
(ex) In case of “TC-3000C”, input “54.43.2D.33.30.30.30.42”

READ:SYS:TESTER:NUM_RESP?
Description
This command reads maximum number of response during the inquiry of a tester

CONF:SYS:TESTER:NUM_RESP <Value>
Description
This command sets maximum number of responses from the Inquiry of a tester.
For example, if this value is set 1, TC-3000C will find only one DUT and finish immediately the inquiry
procedure.

Value
Inquiry Responses : 0 ~ 16, 1(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:PINCODE?
Description
This command reads PIN code(passkey) of the tester.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:PINCODE <Value>
Description
This command writes PIN code(passkey) of the tester. The PIN is used to authenticate two Bluetooth

102
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

devices(that have not previously exchanged link keys) to each other and create a trusted relationship
between then and is used in pairing procedure to generate the initial link key that is used for further
authentication.

Value
PIN code : 16 bytes as a hexadeciamal notation
(ex) In case of “1234”, input “31.32.33.34.30.30.30.30.30.30.30.30.30.30.30.30”

READ:SYS:TESTER:SKIP_PAIR?
Description
This command reads the flag to skip pairing procedure.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:SKIP_PAIR <Value>
Description
This command writes the flag to skip pairing procedure. If the flag to skip pairing is ON, the link key, which is
defined by “CONF:SYS:TESTER:LINK_KEY” will be used for authentication procedure.

Value
the flag to skip pairing procedure : ON, OFF(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:LINK_KEY?
Description
This command reads the link key which is used for authentication procedure if the flag to skip pairing is ON.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:LINK_KEY <Value>
Description
This command writes the link key which is used for authentication procedure if the flag to skip pairing is ON.

Value
Link key : 16 bytes as a hexadeciamal notation
For example, input “C3.82.92.B4.C5.F2.39.79.24.4A.F0.96.55.1A.E8.98”.

READ:SYS:TESTER:BD_ADDR?
Description
This command reads Bluetooth Device ADDRess(BD_ADDR) of a tester.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:BD_ADDR <Value>
Description
This command writes Bluetooth Device ADDRess(BD_ADDR) of a tester.

Value
Bluetooth device address : 9abc56781234(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:MOD_INDEX?
Description
This command reads FSK modulation index.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:MOD_INDEX <Value>
Description
This command writes FSK modulation index.

Value
modulation index : 0.28 ~ 0.35, 0.32(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:ENCRYPTION?
Discription
This command reads Encryption parameter of LMP features.

103
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:SYS:TESTER:ENCRYPTION <Value>
Description
This command sets Encryption parameter of LMP feature. If this value is set ‘ON’, ‘encr’ of LMP feature is
displayed as ‘1’.

Value
encryption : ON(default), OFF
READ:SYS:TESTER:NAME_DISCOVERY?
Discription
This command reads the User Friendly Name which is got during Discovery procedure.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:NAME_DISCOVERY <Value>
Description
This command sets whether the User Friendly Name is read or not by tester.

Value
Name_discovery : ON(default), OFF

READ:SYS:TESTER:PAUSE_TEST?
Discription
This command reads the Pause parameter.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:PAUSE_TEST <Value>
Description
This command sets Pause parameter.

Value
Pause_test : ON, OFF(default)

READ:SYS:TESTER:INIT_AUTHN?
Discription
This command reads the setting parameter of Init authentication.

CONF:SYS:TESTER:INIT_AUTHN <Value>
Description
This command to set whether to enable or disable the ‘Init authentication’ parameter.

Value
Pause_test : ON, OFF(default)

READ:SYS:DUT:HCI_TYPE?
Description
This command reads the number of ports and the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:HCI_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes the number of ports and the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT

Value
HCI Type : NONE(default), USB1, USB2, RS1, RS2, UART1, UART2, BCSP1, BCSP2, 2WIRE1, 2WIRE2

104
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

If you would like to change the number of ports and the type of HCI transport
layer, you must send “EXEC:NEW_DUT” command after sending this command.
NOTE

READ:SYS:DUT:PATH_LOSS?
Description
This command reads the path loss.

CONF:SYS:DUT:PATH_LOSS <Value>
Description
This command writes the path loss. In order to find a proper path loss, make use of power-channel.

Value
path loss : 0 ~ 80, 0(default)

READ:SYS:DUT:INQ_SUPPORTED?
Description
This command reads the flag whether the DUT supports inquiry.

CONF:SYS:DUT:INQ_SUPPORTED <Value>
Description
This command writes the flag whether the DUT supports inquiry. If you already know the BD address of DUT,
you can set BD address using “CONF:SYS:DUT:BD_ADDR command and set this value as ‘ OFF’ to skip the
Inquiry procedure.

Value
Inquiry Supported : ON(default), OFF

READ:SYS:DUT:BD_ADDR?
Description
This command reads Bluetooth Device ADDRess(BD_ADDR) of a DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:BD_ADDR <Value>
Description
This command wirtes Bluetooth Device ADDRess(BD_ADDR) of a DUT. This should be meaningful only in
the case if the DUT does not support inquiry. Use the command “CONF:SYS:DUT:INQ_SUPPORTED OFF”
to set the flag that the DUT does not support inquiry.

Value
Bluetooth Device Address of DUT

READ:SYS:DUT:CONN_FOR_TEST?
Description
This command reads the flag which defines whether connection(LMP level) should be created before
activation the test mode of the DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:CONN_FOR_TEST <Value>
Description
This command writes the flag which defines whether connection(LMP level) should be created before
activation the test mode of the DUT.

Value
Connection for test mode : ON(default), OFF

105
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

If you want to enter test mode without LMP connection, you must set this value
to OFF. That is to say, if your test aim is just to measure RF test cases, set OFF.
NOTE

READ:SYS:DUT:BAUDRATE?
Description
This command reads baud rate depending on the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:BAUDRATE <Value>
Description
This command writes baud rate depending on the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT. It is available for
UART or BCSP.

Value
baud rate : 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

READ:SYS:DUT:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads the test mode of the DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes the test mode of the DUT. The test mode supports testing of the Bluetooth transmitter
and receiver. It is intended mainly for certification/compliance testing of the radio and baseband layer and
may also be used for regulatory approval or acceptance on a HW or SW interface shall be allowed.

Value
test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST(default), TRANSMITTER_TEST, NULL_PKT_TEST

In general, test mode must be loopback or transmitter mode except for audio test.
NOTE

READ:SYS:DUT:POW_SET_TIME?
Description
This command reads interval of time when the tester must to wait after until the DUT will reach the new
power step in milliseconds.

CONF:SYS:DUT:POW_SET_TIME <Value>
Description
This command writes interval of time when the tester must to wait after until the DUT will reach the new
power step in milliseconds.

Value
power set time : 1 ~ 65535, 1000(default)

READ:SYS:RF:TX_POW?
Description

106
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads the transmitter power of a tester.

CONF:SYS:RF:TX_POW <Value>
Description
This command writes the transmitter power of a tester.

Value
TX Power : 0 ~ -80, -30(default)

READ:SYS:RF:ATT?
Description
This command reads the “30dB RX Attenuator” state of a tester.

CONF:SYS:RF:ATT <Value>
Description
This command writes the “30dB RX Attenuator” state of a tester.

Value
30dB RX Attenuator : ON(default), OFF

READ:SYS:RF:AGC?
Description
This command reads the RX AGC(Automatic Gain Control) value of a tester.

CONF:SYS:RF:AGC <Value>
Description
This command writes the RX AGC(Automatic Gain Control) value of a tester.

Value
AGC : ON(default), OFF

READ:SYS:RF:RX_GAIN?
Description
This command reads the gain of RX amplifier of a tester.

CONF:SYS:RF:RX_GAIN <Value>
Description
This command writes the gain of RX amplifier of a tester. To make use of this command, send
“CONF:SYS:RF:AGC OFF” command prior to this command.

Value
RX gain : 10dB, 20dB(default), 30dB, 40dB, 50dB, 60dB, 70dB

READ:SYS:RF:10M_REF?
Description
This command reads the type of reference oscillator of a tester.

CONF:SYS:RF:10M_REF <Value>
Description
This command writes whether reference oscillator of a tester is internal or external. In order to use your
10MHz reference oscillator, user has to call this function with external reference oscillator parameter.

Value
Type of reference oscillator : INT(default), EXT

READ:SYS:DUT:PACK_TYPE?
Description

107
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads the packet type of DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type of DUT.

Value
Packet_type : DH1(default), HV1, HV3, AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5, EV3, EV4, EV5, 2-DH1, 3-DH1,
2-DH3, 3-DH3, 2-DH5, 3-DH5, 2-EV3, 3-EV3, 2-EM5, 3-EV5

READ:SYS:DUT:BIT_PATTERN?
Description
This command reads the bit pattern of DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:BIT_PATTERN <Value>
Description
This command writes bit pattern of DUT.

Value
Bit_pattern : 00000000, 11111111, 10101010(default), 11110000, PRBS9

READ:SYS:DUT:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode of DUT.

CONF:SYS:DUT:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode of DUT.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:SYS:DUT:TX_CH?
Description
This command reads TX channel of a tester. (RX for DUT)

CONF:SYS:DUT:TX_CH <Value>
Description
This command writes TX channel of a tester.

Value
Tx_ch : 0(default) ~ 78

READ:SYS:DUT:RX_CH?
Description
This command reads RX channel of a tester. (TX for DUT)

CONF:SYS:DUT:RX_CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX channel of a tester.

Value
Tx_ch : 0(default) ~ 78

READ:SYS:DUT:Link?
Description
This command checks whether a RF link with a DUT exists.

108
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Return Value
Link : ON, OFF

5.3.2 Access Command

EXEC:RESET
Description
This command sets “Standby” state of the tester’s Host controller and clears databases of discovered DUTs
and links (ACL and SCO) at both Host and Host controller.

EXEC:NEW_DUT
Description
This command reinitializes (creates) HCI transport layer to the DUT (if necessary) and resets the tester.

EXEC:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of running commands.

EXEC:PRESET
Description
This command is used to reset most of parameters of TC-3000C to default value.

EXEC:LOCAL
Description
This command is used to change remote mode to local mode.

EXEC:DISCOVERABLE
Description
This command is used to make TC-3000C a Bluetooth device in range that will respond to an inquiry/page
message.

READ:SERIAL_NUM?
Description
This command reads serial number of TC-3000C.

READ:GUI_VERSION?
Description
This command reads firmware version of TC-3000C.

READ:CONN_DUT_BD_ADDR?
Description
This command reads Bluetooth device address from DUT under connection state.

READ:CONN_DUT_NAME?
Description
This command reads Bluetooth device name from DUT under connection state.

EXEC:DISCOVER
Description
This command find Bluetooth device of circumference.

READ:DISCOVERED_BD_ADDR?
Description

109
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads the BD addresses which are discovered during the Discover procedure.

5.3.3 RF Test Cases Command

EXEC:RFTC:STOP
Description
This command stops measurement of test cases in progress.

EXEC:RFTC:CONN
Description
This command executes connection(LMP level).

EXEC:RFTC:DISC
Description
This command executes disconnection if connection exists.

5.3.4 Output Power(OP)

EXEC:RFTC:OP:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the maximum peak and average output power(TRM/CA/01/C).

EXEC:RFTC:OP:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of output power measurement.

READ:RFTC:OP:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:OP:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:OP:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:OP:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : LONGEST(default), DM1, DH1, AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5

READ:RFTC:OP:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:OP:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description

110
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command writes number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 1(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:OP:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:OP:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:OP:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:OP:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST, NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:OP:P_AVG?
Description
This command reads the average power.

READ:RFTC:OP:P_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum power.

READ:RFTC:OP:P_MAX?
Description
This command writes maximum power.

5.3.5 Power Density(PD)

EXEC:RFTC:PD:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the lowest and highest frequencies below and above the operating
frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of 80dBm/Hz e.i.r.p(-30dBm if measured
in a 100kHz bandwidth). This can be used for the power density test case(TRM/CA/02/C).

EXEC:RFTC:PD:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of power density measurement.

READ:RFTC:PD:DATA_LEN?
Description
This command reads length of payload’s data.

111
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:RFTC:PD:DATA_LEN <Value>
Description
This command writes length of payload’s data.

Value
data length : 0 ~ 339, 0(default-longest supported length)

READ:RFTC:PD:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:PD:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:PD:P_DEN?
Description
This command reads maximum value of the power density per 100kHz EIRP.

READ:RFTC:PD:F_MAX?
Description
This command reads center frequency at which the power density reached the maximum value.

5.3.6 Power Control(PC)

EXEC:RFTC:PC:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the minimum RF output power and the step of power controlled by
the DUT at the given TX frequency. This can be used for power control test case(TRM/CA/03/C).

EXEC:RFTC:PC:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of power control measurement.

READ:RFTC:PC:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:PC:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:PC:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:PC:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

112
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Value
packet type : LONGEST, DM1, DH1(default), AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5

READ:RFTC:PC:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:PC:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command wrties number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 1(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:PC:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:PC:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:PC:P_MIN?
Description
This command reads the minimum power in 0.01dBm.

READ:RFTC:PC:P_MAX?
Description
This command reads the maximum power in 0.01 dBm.

READ:RFTC:PC:P_ST_MIN?
Description
This command reads the minimum power step in 0.01 dBm.

READ:RFTC:PC:P_ST_MAX?
Description
This command reads the maximum power step in 0.01 dBm.

5.3.7 Enhances Power Control(EPC)

EXEC:RFTC:EPC:RUN
Description
This can be used for Enhanced power control test case(TRM/CA/14/C).

EXEC:RFTC:EPC:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of Enhanced power control measurement.

READ:RFTC:EPC:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

113
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:RFTC:EPC:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:EPC:PACK_SLOT?
Description
This command reads packet slot.

CONF:RFTC:EPC:PACK_SLOT <Value>
Description
This command writes packet slot.

Value
packet slot : 1(default, DH1,2-DH1,3-DH1), 3(DH3,2-DH3,3-DH3), 5(DH5, 2-DH5, 3-DH5)

READ:RFTC:EPC:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:EPC:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command wrties number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 1(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:EPC:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:EPC:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:EPC:P_MIN?
Description
This command reads the minimum power in 0.01dBm.

READ:RFTC:EPC:P_MAX?
Description
This command reads the maximum power in 0.01 dBm.

READ:RFTC:EPC:P_ST_MIN?
Description
This command reads the minimum power step in 0.01 dBm.

READ:RFTC:EPC:P_ST_MAX?
Description
This command reads the maximum power step in 0.01 dBm.

114
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

5.3.8 Frequency Range(FR)

EXEC:RFTC:FR:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of lowest and highest frequencies below and above the operating
frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of 80dBm/Hz e.i.r.p(-30 dBm if measured
in a 100 kHz bandwidth). This can be used for the frequency range test case(TRM/CA/04/C).

EXEC:RFTC:FR:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of frequency range measurement.

READ:RFTC:FR:DATA_LEN?
Description
This command reads length of payload’s data of frequency range.

CONF:RFTC:FR:DATA_LEN <Value>
Description
This command writes length of payload’s data.

Value
length of payload’s data : 0 ~ 339, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:FR:SWP_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of sweeps.

CONF:RFTC:FR:SWP_NUM <Value>
Description
This command wirtes number of sweeps.

Value
Number of sweeps : 1 ~ 65535, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:FR:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:FR:TEST_MODE
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:FR:F_L?
Description
This command reads lowest frequency below the operating frequencies at which spectral power density
drops below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p(-30 dBm if measured in a 100kHz bandwidth)

READ:RFTC:FR:F_H?
Description
This command reads highest frequency above the operating frequencies at which spectral power density
drops below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p(-30 dBm if measured in a 100kHz bandwidth)

115
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

5.3.9 20dB Bandwidth(20BW)

EXEC:RFTC:20BW:RUN
Description
This command executes the measurement of the lowest and highest frequencies below and above the
operating frequency at which transmit power drops 20dB below the highest power value in the transmit
channel at the given TX frequency. This can be used for TX Output Spectrum -20dB Bandwidth test
case(TRM/Ca/05/C).

EXEC:RFTC:20BW:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of measurement of 20 dB bandwidth.

READ:RFTC:20BW:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:20BW:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:20BW:DATA_LEN?
Description
This command reads length of payload’s data.

CONF:RFTC:20BW:DATA_LEN <Value>
Description
This command writes length of payload’s data.

Value
length of payload’s data : 0 ~ 339, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:20BW:SWP_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of sweeps.

CONF:RFTC:20BW:SWP_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of sweeps.

Value
Number of sweeps : 1 ~ 65535, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:20BW:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:20BW:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

116
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:20BW:BW?
Description
This command reads the difference between f_l and f_h. f_l is lowest frequency in Ha below the operating
frequency at which transmit power derops 20dB below the highest power value in the transmit channel. f_h is
highest frequency in Hz above the operating frequencies at which transmit power drops 20dB below the
highest power value in the transmit channel.

5.3.10 Adjacent Channel Power(ACP)

EXEC:RFTC:ACP:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of power in adjacent channels. This can be used for TX output
spectrum – Adjacent Channel Power test case(TRM/CA/06/C).

EXEC:RFTC:ACP:STOP
Description
This command reads execution of adjacent channel power.

READ:RFTC:ACP:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:ACP:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:ACP:DATA_LEN?
Description
This command reads length of payload’s data.

CONF:RFTC:ACP:DATA_LEN <Value>
Description
This command writes length of payload’s data.

Value
length of payload’s data : 0 ~ 339, 27(default)

READ:RFTC:ACP:SWP_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of sweeps.

CONF:RFTC:ACP:SWP_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of sweeps.

Value
Number of sweeps : 1 ~ 65535, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:ACP:TEST_MODE?

117
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:ACP:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:ACP:P_TX?
Description
This command reads power in adjacent channel.

5.3.11 Modulation Characteristics(MOD)

EXEC:RFTC:MOD:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the modulation index for 11110000 and 10101010 bit patterns at
the given TX frequency. This can be used for the Modulation Characteristics test case(TRM/CA/07/C).

EXEC:RFTC:MOD:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of modulation characteristics.

READ:RFTC:MOD:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:MOD:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:MOD:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:MOD:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : LONGEST(default), DM1, DH1, AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5

READ:RFTC:MOD:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:MOD:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of packets.

118
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Value
number of packet : 10(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:MOD:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:MOD:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:MOD:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:MOD:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:MOD:DF1_AVG?
Description
This command reads average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
11110000 pattern in HZ divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:MOD:DF2_AVG?
Description
This command reads average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:MOD:DF2_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:MOD:DF2_RATE?
Description
This command reads pass rate of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

5.3.12 Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance(ICFT)

EXEC:RFTC:ICFT:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the transmitter carrier frequency accuracy at the given TX
frequency. This can be used for the initial carrier frequency tolerance test case(TRM/CA/08/C).

EXEC:RFTC:ICFT:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of initial carrier frequency tolerance.

119
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:ICFT:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:ICFT:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:ICFT:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:ICFT:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 10(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:ICFT:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:ICFT:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:ICFT:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:ICFT:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_AVG?
Description

120
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads average deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

5.3.13 Carrier Frequency Drift(CFD)

EXEC:RFTC:CFD:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the transmitter center frequency drift within a packet the given TX
frequency. This can be used for the carrier frequency drift test case(TRM/CA/09/C).

EXEC:RFTC:CFD:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of carrier frequency drift.

READ:RFTC:CFD:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:CFD:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:CFD:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:CFD:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : LONGEST(default), DM1, DH1, AUX1, DM3, DH3, DM5, DH5

READ:RFTC:CFD:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

CONF:RFTC:CFD:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 10(default), 0 ~ 65535

READ:RFTC:CFD:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:CFD:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value

121
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

hopping mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:CFD:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode.

CONF:RFTC:CFD:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:CFD:DRIFT_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal frequency drift in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:CFD:RATE_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal drift rate in hundreds Hz per 50 us.

5.3.14 Single Slot Sensitivity(SS)

EXEC:RFTC:SS:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of single slot sensitivity test case(RCV/CA/01/C).

EXEC:RFTC:SS:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of single slot sensitivity.

READ:RFTC:SS:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:SS:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:SS:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:SS:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : DH1(default), AUX1

READ:RFTC:SS:HOP?
Description

122
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:SS:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:RFTC:SS:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

CONF:RFTC:SS:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command writes RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327.68 ~ 20

READ:RFTC:SS:BYTES?
Description
This command reads minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

CONF:RFTC:SS:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command writes minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

Value
minimum number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 200000(default)

READ:RFTC:SS:DIRTY_TX?
Description
This command reads dirty transmitter mode.

CONF:RFTC:SS:DIRTY_TX <Value>
Description
This command writes dirty transmitter mode.

Value
dirty transmitter mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:SS:BER?
Description
This command reads bit error rate.

5.3.15 Multi Slot Sensitivity(SM)

EXEC:RFTC:SM:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of multi slot sensitivity test case(RCV/CA/02/C).

EXEC:RFTC:SM:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of multi slot sensitivity.

123
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:SM:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:SM:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:SM:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:SM:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : DH3, DH5(default)

READ:RFTC:SM:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:SM:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:RFTC:SM:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

CONF:RFTC:SM:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command writes RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327.68 ~ 20

READ:RFTC:SM:BYTES?
Description
This command reads minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

CONF:RFTC:SM:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command writes minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

Value
minimum number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 200000(default)

124
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:SM:DIRTY_TX?
Description
This command reads dirty transmitter mode.

CONF:RFTC:SM:DIRTY_TX <Value>
Description
This command writes dirty transmitter mode.

Value
dirty transmitter mode : ON(default), OFF

READ:RFTC:SM:BER?
Description
This command reads bit error rate.

5.3.16 Maximum Input Level(ML)

EXEC:RFTC:ML:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of maximum input level test case(RCV/CA/06/C).

EXEC:RFTC:ML:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of maximum input level.

READ:RFTC:ML:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:ML:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:ML:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:ML:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:RFTC:ML:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

CONF:RFTC:ML:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command writes RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

125
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Value
DUT RX Level : -327.68 ~ 20, -20(default)

READ:RFTC:ML:BYTES?
Description
This command reads minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

CONF:RFTC:ML:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command writes minimum number of samples(returned payload bytes) to measure BER.

Value
minimum number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 200000(default)

READ:RFTC:ML:BER?
Description
This command reads bit error rate.

5.3.17 Quick Test(OPMOD)

EXEC:RFTC:OPMOD:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of quick test containg output power, modulation characteristics, initial
carrier frequency, and carrier frequency drift at a time.

EXEC:RFTC:OPMOD:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of quick test(EXEC:RFTC:OPMOD:RUN).

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:OPMOD:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:OPMOD:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : LONGEST, DH1(default), AUX1, DH3, DH5

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets.

126
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:RFTC:OPMOD:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command writes number of packets.

Value
number of packet : 0 ~ 65535, 2(default)

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:OPMOD:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command sets test mode.

CONF:RFTC:OPMOD:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command writes test mode.

Value
Test mode : LOOPBACK_TEST, TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), NULL_PKT_TEST

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:P_AVG?
Description
This command reads the average power.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:P_MAX?
Description
This command reads the maximum power.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:P_MIN?
Description
This command reads the minimum power.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF1_AVG?
Description
This command reads average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
11110000 pattern in HZ divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF2_AVG?
Description
This command reads average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF2_MIN?
Description

127
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

This command reads minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF2_RATE?
Description
This command reads pass rate of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF0_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DF0_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:DRIFT_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal frequency drift in hundreds Hz.

READ:RFTC:OPMOD:RATE_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximal drift rate in hundreds Hz per 50 us.

5.3.18 BER & FER

BER & FER Test provides measurement of the Bit Error Rate and the Packet Error
Rate at the given RX frequency. BER & FER test measure BER & FER value
based on transmitted packets whilst Single Shot Sensitivity (SS) and Multi Slot
Sensitivity (MS) do the measurement on received packets base. This method is
prone to incur packet loss during the packet exchange as the tester will not re-
NOTE
transmit the concerned packet even though DUT fails to receive it. According to BT
specification, a precise measurement should be accomplished through Single Shot
Sensitivity (SS) and Multi Slot Sensitivity (MS) test case.

EXEC:RFTC:BERFER:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of BER & FER test.

EXEC:RFTC:BERFER:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of BER & FER test.

READ:RFTC:BERFER:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value

128
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

channel : RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT), 0 ~ 78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:RFTC:BERFER:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type.

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes packet type.

Value
packet type : DH3, DH5(default)

READ:RFTC:BERFER:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode.

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:HOP <Value>
Description
This command writes hopping mode.

Value
hopping mode : ON, OFF(default)

READ:RFTC:BERFER:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command writes RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327.68 ~ 20

READ:RFTC:BERFER:BYTES?
Description
This command reads minimum number of packets to measure BER & FER.

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command writes minimum number of packets to measure BER & FER.

Value
minimum number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 500(default)

READ:RFTC:BERFER:DIRTY_TX?
Description
This command reads dirty transmitter mode.

CONF:RFTC:BERFER:DIRTY_TX <Value>
Description
This command writes dirty transmitter mode.

Value
dirty transmitter mode : ON(default), OFF

129
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:BERFER:BER?
Description
This command reads bit error rate from BER & FER test

Returned Value
 The measurement returns BER values of each channel established in accordance with the sequence
and quantities.
 A delimiter “ ,” is used to separate the measured values over the channels set.
 nan: This value returns when no effective measurement value exists or no packet is received.

READ:RFTC:BERFER:PER?
Description
This command reads packet error rate from BER & FER test.

Returned Value
 The measurement returns PER values of each channel established in accordance with the sequence
and quantities.
 A delimiter “ ,” is used to separate the measured values over the channels set.
 nan: This value returns when no effective measurement value exists or no packet is received.

5.3.19 EDR Relative Transmitter Power(ETP)

EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)

EXEC:RFTC:ETP:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of running EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement. It is
used to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:ETP:RUN” command.

READ:RFTC:ETP:CH?
Description
This command reads channl value for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement

CONF:RFTC:ETP:CH <Value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:ETP:CH 0
In case of setting channel0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:ETP:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:ETP:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement

CONF:RFTC:ETP:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value

130
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-


EV5,3-2V5

READ:RFTC:ETP:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packet for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ETP:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command sets number of packet for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
Number of packets : 0~65535, 1(default)

READ:RFTC:ETP:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.
CONF:RFTC:ETP:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command sets test mode for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
Test Mode : TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), LOOPBACK_TEST

READ:RFTC:ETP:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ETP:HOP <Value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_FSK?
Description
This command reads GFSK average output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_FSK?" command, "
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN " command should be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_PSK?
Description
This command reads DPSK average output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_PSK? " command, "
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN" command should be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_FSK?
Description
This command reads GFSK maximum output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_FSK?" command, "
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN" command should be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_PSK?
Description
This command reads DPSK maximum output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_PSK?" command, "

131
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN" command should be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_FSK?
Description
This command reads GFSK minimum output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_FSK?" command, "
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN" command should be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_PSK?
Description
This command reads DPSK minimum output power of EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)
measurement. Before reading this value by " READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_PSK?" command, "
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN" command should be exected to update measurement value.

5.3.20 EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(EFSMA)

EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement.

EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C)
measurement. It is used to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN”
command.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:CH?
Description
This command reads channel value for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:CH <Value>
Description
This command checks channel for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C)
measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C)
measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/11/C)
measurement

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

132
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packets for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command sets number of packet for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement

Value
Number of packets : 0~65535, 10(default)

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads testmode for EDR Carrier Frequency Stablility & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C)
measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:TEST_MODE <Value>
Description
This command sets test mode for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C)
measurement.

Value
Test Mode : TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), LOOPBACK_TEST

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EFSMA:HOP <value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement

Value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximum value of initial frequency error(Wi) from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability &
Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
"EAD:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_MAX?" command, "EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN" command should be exected to
update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0_MAX?
Description
This command reads Maximum value of Block Frequency Error(Wo) from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability &
Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0_MAX?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to update
measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0I_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximum value of Initial Frequency Error and sum of Block Frequency Error(Wi+W0)
from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement.

133
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Before reading this value by “READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W01_MAX?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN”


command be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:RMS_DEVM_MAX?
Description
This command reads Maximum value of RMS DEVM freom EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:RMS_DEVM_MAX?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to
update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PEAK_DEVM_MAX?
Description
This command reads maximum value of PEAK DEVM from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PEAK_DEVM_MAX?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected
to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:DEVM_RATE?
Description
This command reads DEVM Rate value from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by “READ:RFTC:EFSMA:DEVM_RATE?”
command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN “ command be exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum value of Initial Frequency Error(Wi) from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability &
Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) command. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_MIN?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to update
measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum value of Block Frequency Error(W0) from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability &
Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0_MIN?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to update
measurement value.
READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0I_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum value of sum(Wi+W0) of Block Frequency Error and Initial Frequency Error
from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy (TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading
this value by “READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W01_MIN?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be
exected to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_AV?
Description
This command reads average value of Initial Frequency Error and sum of Block Frequency Error(Wi+W0)
from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading
this value by “READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WI_AV?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected
to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WO_AV?
Description
This command reads average value of Block Frequency Error(W0) from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability &
Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0_AV?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to update
measurement value.

134
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:WOI_AV?
Description
This command reads average value of Initial Frequency Error and sum of Block Frequency Error(Wi+W0)
from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading
this value by “READ:RFTC:EFSMA:W0I_AV?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected
to update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:RMS_DEVM_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum value of RMS DEVM from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:RMS_DEVM_MIN?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN“ command be exected to
update measurement value.

READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PEAK_DEVM_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum value of PEAK DEVM from EDR Carrier Frequency Stability & Modulation
Accuracy(TRM/CA/11/C) measurement. Before reading this value by
“READ:RFTC:EFSMA:PEAK_DEVM_MIN?” command, “EXEC:RFTC:EFSMA:RUN” command be exected to
update measurement value.

5.3.21 EDR Differential Phase Encoding(EDPE)

EXEC:RFTC:EDPE:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

EXEC:RFTC:EDPE:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement. It is used
to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:EDE:RUN” command.

READ:RFTC:EDPE:CH?
Description
This command reads channel value for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EDPE:CH <Value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:EDPE:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:EDPE:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:EDPE:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EDPE:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

135
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:EDPE:PACK_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of packet for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EDPE:PACK_NUM <Value>
Description
This command sets number of packet for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement

Value
Number of packets : 0~65535, 100(default)

READ:RFTC:EDPE:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EDPE:HOP <Value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR differential phase encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement.

value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:EDPE:BER?
Description
This command reads BER value for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement. Before
reading this value using “READ:RFTC:EDPE:BER?” command, RF test case should be executed to update
this value by sending “EXEC:RFTC:EDPE:RUN”.

READ:RFTC:EDPE:PER?
Description
This command reads PER value for EDR Differential Phase Encoding(TRM/CA/12/C) measurement. Before
reading this value use “READ:RFTC:EDPE:PER? Command, RF test case should be executed to update
this value by sending “EXEC:RFTC:EDPE:RUN”.

5.3.22 EDR In-band Spurious Emission(ETP)

EXEC:RFTC:ESE:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR In-band Spurius Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

EXEC:RFTC:ESE:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement. It is used
to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:ESE:RUN” command.

READ:RFTC:ESE:CH?
Description
This command reads channel value for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ESE:CH <value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

value

136
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:ESE:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:ESE:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:ESE:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ESE:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

READ:RFTC:ESE:TEST_MODE?
Description
This command reads test mode for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ESE:TEST_MODE <값>
Description
This command sets test mode for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

Value
Test Mode : TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), LOOPBACK_TEST

READ:RFTC:ESE:SWP_NUM?
Description
This command reads number of sweep for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ESE:SWP_NUM <Value>
Description
This command sets number of sweep for EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C) measurement.

Value
Number of sweeps : 1~65535, 10(default)

READ:RFTC:ESE:P_TX?
Description
This command reads adjacent channel power from EDR In-band Spurious Emission(TRM/CA/13/C)
measurement. Before reading this value use “READ:RFTC:ESE:P_TX?” Command, RF test case should be
executed to update this value by sending “EXEC:RFTC:ESE:RUN”.

5.3.23 EDR Sensitivity(ES)

EXEC:RFTC:ES:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

EXEC:RFTC:ES:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of running EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement. It is used to cancel
the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:ES:RUN” command.

137
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:ES:CH?
Description
This command reads channel value for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ES:CH <Value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:ES:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:ES:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:ES:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR Sensitivity (RCV/CA/07/C) measurement

CONF:RFTC:ES:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

READ:RFTC:ES:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ES:HOP <Value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

Value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:ES:DIRTY_TX?
Description
This command reads Dirty Transmitter value for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ES:DIRTY_TX <Value>
Description
This command sets Dirty Transmitter for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

Value
Dirty Transmitter Mode : OFF, ON(default)

READ:RFTC:ES:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads DUT RX Level value for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ES:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command sets DUT RX Level for EDR Sensitivity (RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327~20, -70(default)

138
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:RFTC:ES:BYTES?
Description
This command reads number of received byte for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:ES:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command sets number of received byte for EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement.

Value
DUT RX Level : 0 ~ 2147000000, 200000(default)

READ:RFTC:ES:BER?
Description
This command reads BER value from EDR Sensitivity(RCV/CA/07/C) measurement. Before reading this
value use “READ:RFTC:ES:BER?” Command, RF test case should be executed to update this value by
sending “EXEC:RFTC:ES:RUN”.

5.3.24 EDR BER Floor Performance(EBP)

EXECRFTC:EBP:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

EXEC:RFTC:EBP:STOP
Description
This command stops exection of running EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement. It is
used to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:EBP:RUN” command.

READ:RFTC:EBP:CH?
Description
This command reads channel value for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:CH <Value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(ex) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:EBP:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:EBP:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:EBP:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

READ:RFTC:EBP:HOP?

139
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:HOP <Value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:EBP:DIRTY_TX?
Description
This command reads Dirty Transmitter value for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:DIRTY_TX <Value>
Description
This command sets Dirty Transmitter for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
Dirty Transmitter Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:EBP:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads DUT RX Level value for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command sets DUT RX Level for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327~20, -60(default)

READ:RFTC:EBP:BYTES?
Description
This command reads number of received byte for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C)
measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EBP:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command sets number of received byte for EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.

Value
Number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 1000000(default)

READ:RFTC:EBP:BER?
Description
This command reads BER value from EDR BER Floor Performance(RCV/CA/08/C) measurement.
Before reading this value use “READ:RFTC:EBP:BER?” Command, RF test case should be executed to
update this value by sending “EXEC:RFTC:EBP:RUN ”.

5.3.25 EDR Maximum Input Level(EML)

EXEC:RFTC:EML:RUN
Description
This command executes EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

140
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

EXEC:RFTC:EML:STOP
Description
This command stops execution of running EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement. It is
used to cancel the running RF test case which is started by “EXE:RFTC:EML:RUN” command.

READ:RFTC:EML:CH?
Description
This command reads setting channel for EDR Maxmim Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EML:CH <Value>
Description
This command sets channel for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA.10) measurement.

Value
channel : 0-39-78(default)
(예) In case of setting channel 0 : CONF:RFTC:EML:CH 0
In case of setting channel 0, 39, 78 : CONF:RFTC:EML:CH 0-39-78

READ:RFTC:EML:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads packet type fro EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EML:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command sets packet type for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement

Value
Packet type : 2-LONGEST(default),3-LONGEST,2-DH1,3-DH1,2-DH3,3-DH3,2-DH5,3-DH5,2-EV3,3-EV3,2-
EV5,3-2V5

READ:RFTC:EML:HOP?
Description
This command reads hopping mode for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EML:HOP <Value>
Description
This command sets hopping mode for EDR Maximum Input Level(CV/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
Hopping Mode : OFF(default), ON

READ:RFTC:EML:RX_LEV?
Description
This command reads DUT RX Level value for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

CONF:RFTC:EML:RX_LEV <Value>
Description
This command sets DUT RX Level for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
DUT RX Level : -327~20, -20(default)

READ:RFTC:EML:BYTES?
Description
This command reads number of received byte for EDR Masimum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

141
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:RFTC:EML:BYTES <Value>
Description
This command sets number of received byte for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement.

Value
Number of samples : 0 ~ 2147000000, 200000(default)

READ:RFTC:EML:BER?
Description
This command reads BER value for EDR Maximum Input Level(RCV/CA/10/C) measurement. Before
reading this value use “READ:RFTC:EML:BER?” Command, RF test case should be executed to update this
value by sending “EXEC:RFTC:EML:RUN ”.

5.3.26 Audio Test Command

EXEC:AUDIO:CONN
Description
This command executes ACL connection with profile.

EXEC:AUDIO:DISC
Description
This command executes disconnection after closing profile.

EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_INIT
Description
This command executes tone initialization before tone generation.

EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_START
Description
This command starts sending of audio tone signal to the DUT.

EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_STOP
Description
This command stops sending of audio tone signal to the DUT.

EXEC:AUDIO:INCOMING_CALL
Description
Tester shall send a sequence of unsolicited RING alerts to the HF(DUT). The HF shall produce a local
alerting in reaction to the RING.

Response
<Incoming_call> : OK | Disconnected Profile State | unknown command error

READ:AUDIO:PROFILE_TYPE?
Description
This command reads the type of the DUT profile.

CONF:AUDIO:PROFILE_TYPE
Description
This command writes the type of the DUT profile.

Value
profile type : NONE, HEADSET, HANDSFREE(default), AUDIOGATEWAY

142
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:AUDIO:TONE_FREQ?
Description
This command reads the frequency of the tone signal which would be sent by a tester.

CONF:AUDIO:TONE_FREQ
Description
This command writes the frequency of the tone signal which would be sent by a tester.

Value
tone frequency : 400 ~ 1000, 1000(default)

READ:AUDIO:TONE_LEV?
Description
This command reads the amplitude of the tone signal which would be sent by a tester.

CONF:AUDIO:TONE_LEV <Value>
Description
This command writes the amplitude of the tone signal which would be sent by a tester.

Value
tone frequency : -70 ~ 3, -10(default)

READ:AUDIO:TEST:AUDIO_IN?
Description
This command reads notch filter value.

CONF:AUDIO:TEST:AUDIO_IN <Value>
Description
This command writes notch filter value in accordance with received audio signal.

Value
notch filter : 400, 1000(default)

READ:AUDIO:GAIN_CTRL?
Description
This command reads the parameter which decides whether it controls a mike or speaker gain during
connection procedure with Profiles.

CONF:AUDIO:GAIN_CTRL <Value>
Description
This command sets the parameter which decides whether it controls a mike or speaker gain during
connection procedure with Profiles.

Value
Gain Control : ON, OFF(default)

READ:AUDIO:VGS?
Description
This command reads speaker gain during connection procedure with Profiles.

CONF:AUDIO:VGS <Value>
Description
This command sets speaker gain during connection procedure with Profiles.

Value
VGS : 0~15, 15(default)

143
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:AUDIO:VGM?
Description
This command reads mike gain during connection procedure with Profiles.

CONF:AUDIO:VGM <Value>
Description
This command sets gain of a mike gain during connection procedure with Profiles.

Value
VGM : 0~15, 15(default)

EXEC:AUDIO:TEST:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement of the parameter of RX audio signal.

READ:AUDIO:TEST:FREQ?
Description
This command reads frequency of the audio signal's power density maximum.
READ:AUDIO:TEST:F_POW?
Description
This command reads peak value of the power in audio spectrum characteristic.

READ:AUDIO:TEST:RMS?
Description
This command reads RMS value of the audio signal.

READ:AUDIO:TEST:SINAD?
Description
This command reads SINAD value of the audio signal.

READ:AUDIO:TEST:DIST?
Description
This command reads distortion of the audio signal.

EXEC:AUDIO:SCOC
Description
This command executes SCO link with a DUT.

EXEC:AUDIO:PAIRABLE
Description
This command executes TC-3000C as slave mode. This differently works depending on profile type.

EXEC:AUDIO:TALK
Description
This command creates ACL(or “ACL and SCO”) link under Audio Gateway Profile. Accordingly user must
send “CONF:AUDIO:PROFILE_TYPE AUDIOGATEWAY” command before this.

EXEC:AUDIO:STOP
Description
This command stops the execution of “EXEC:AUDIO:TALK” command.

READ:AUDIO:PACK_TYPE?
Description
This command reads the packet type the tester shall use for the SCO connection.

144
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

CONF:AUDIO:PACK_TYPE <Value>
Description
This command writes the packet type the tester shall use for the SCO connection.

Value
packet type : HV1, HV2, HV3(default)

READ:AUDIO:AIR_CODING?
Description
This command reads air coding format for SCO links.

CONF:AUDIO:AIR_CODING <Value>
Description
This command writes air coding format for SCO links.

Value
air coding format : CVSD(default), U-LAW, A-LAW

EXEC:AUDIO:LB_START
Description
This command executes entering the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

EXEC:AUDIO:LB_STOP
Description
This command stops the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

READ:AUDIO:LB_DELAY?
Description
This command reads the delay of SCO loopback in milliseconds.

CONF:AUDIO:LB_DELAY <Value>
Description
This command writes the delay of SCO loopback in milliseconds.

Value
delay time : 0, 2, 5

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:AUDIO_IN?
Description
This command reads required filter value.

CONF:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:AUDIO_IN <Value>
Description
This command writes proper filter value in accordance with received audio signal.

Value
filter : 400, 1000(default)

EXEC:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:RUN
Description
This command executes measurement in the audio spectrum.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:FREQ?
Description
This command reads frequency of the audio signal's power density maximum.

145
5.3 Reference Guide using RS-232C commands

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:F_POW?
Description
This command reads peak value of the power in the audio spectrum.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:RMS?
Description
This command reads RMS value of the power in the audio spectrum.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:SINAD?
Description
This command reads SINAD value in the audio spectrum.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DIST?
Description
This command reads distortion in the audio spectrum.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:CH?
Description
This command reads RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

CONF:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:CH <Value>
Description
This command writes RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT).

Value
Tchannel : RX frequency of a tester(TX for a DUT), 0~78, 0-39-78(default)

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:P_AVG?
Description
This command reads the average power.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:P_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum power.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:P_MAX?
Description
This command writes maximum power.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DF0_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DF0_MAX?
Description
This command reads minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DF0_AVG?
Description
This command reads average deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+frequency) MHz in hundreds Hz.

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DF2_AVG?
Description
This command reads average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

146
5.4 Example using command

READ:AUDIO:TEST_OP_ICFT:DF2_MIN?
Description
This command reads minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency for the
10101010 pattern in Hz divided by 100.

5.4 Example using command


☞ EDR Relative Transmit Power(TRM/CA/10/C)

Default setting (to use default value, folling commands can be skipped)
CONF:RFTC:ETP:CH 0-39-78
CONF:RFTC:ETP:PACK_TYPE 2-LONGEST
CONF:RFTC:ETP:PACK_NUM 1
CONF:RFTC:ETP:TEST_MODE TRANSMITTER_TEST
CONF:RFTC:ETP:HOP OFF
Start Measurement
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN
Read measurement result
READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_PSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_PSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_PSK?
To measure once again, execute again the commands as follow
EXEC:RFTC:ETP:RUN
READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PAV_PSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMIN_PSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_FSK?
READ:RFTC:ETP:PMAX_PSK?

147
5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands

5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands

< RF Test Cases >

START

Open COM Port, BAUDRATE

[ Initialization ] EXEC:PRESET 1

CONF:SYS:RF:TX_POW -30.0
[ Basic Configuration ] CONF:SYS:DUT:PATH_LOSS 12.0
CONF:SYS:RF:ATT ON 2

[ ACL Connection ] EXEC:RFTC:CONN

CONF:SYS:DUT:TEST_MODE LOOPBACK_TEST
CONF:RFTC:SS:CH 0-39-78
CONF:RFTC:SS:HOP OFF
CONF:RFTC:SS:DIRTY_TX ON
[ Sensitivity single slot 3
CONF:RFTC:SS:RX_LEV -70
configuration ]
CONF:RFTC:SS:BYTES 10000

[ Measuring RF Test Items ] EXEC:RFTC:SS:RUN 4

[ Read Result Data ] READ:RFTC:SS:BER?

148
5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands

Retest?
Yes
No

EXEC:RESET

Close COM Port

END

1 Set parametes of RF test cases complying with Bluetooth specification.

. 2 Set “TX Power”, “RX ATT”, and “Path Loss” depending on user environments.

3 Set user specific parameter.

4 Start test.

* In case of OUTPUT POWER TEST 2 ~3 procedure.

CONF:SYS:DUT:TEST_MODE TRANSMITTER_TEST
CONF:RFTC:OP:CH 0-39-78
[ Output power configuration ]
CONF:RFTC:OP:PACK_TYPE LONGEST
CONF:RFTC:OP:PACK_NUM 1
CONF:RFTC:OP:HOP ON

[ Measuring RF Test Items ] EXEC:RFTC:OP:RUN

READ:RFTC:OP:P_AVG?
[ Read Result Data ] READ:RFTC:OP:P_MIN?
READ:RFTC:OP:P_MAX?

149
5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands

< Audio Test >

START

Open Port COM, BAUDRATE

[ Initialization ] EXEC:PRESET

CONF:SYS:RF:TX_POW -30
[ Basic Configuration ] CONF:SYS:DUT:PASS_LOSS 12.0
CONF:SYS:RF:ATT ON

CONF:SYS:DUT:TEST_MODE NULL_PKT_TEST
CONF:AUDIO:PROFILE_TYPE NONE
CONF:AUDIO:TONE_FREQ 1000
CONF:AUDIO:TONE_LEV -10
[ Audio Test Configuration ] CONF:AUDIO:TEST:AUDIO_IN 1000
CONF:AUDIO:NUM_AVG 1

EXEC:AUDIO:CONN
[ ACL & SCO Connection ] ( EXEC:AUDIO:TALK )

EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_INIT
[ Tone Generation ] EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_START

[ Measuring AUDIO Test Items ] EXEC:AUDIO:TEST:RUN

150
5.5 Flow Chart for RS-232C Commands

READ:AUDIO:TEST:FREQ?
READ:AUDIO:TEST:F_POW?
READ:AUDIO:TEST:RMS?
[ Read Result Data ] READ:AUDIO:TEST:SINAD?
READ:AUDIO:TEST:DIST?

CONF:RFTC:OP:TEST_MODE NULL_PKT_TEST
EXEC:RFTC:OP:RUN
[Add Audio RF test ] READ:RFTC:OP:P_AVG?
Output Power READ:RFTC:OP:P_MAX?
READ:RFTC:OP:P_MIN?
+ Modulation
+ ICFT CONF:RFTC:ICFT:TEST_MODENULL_PKT_TEST
EXEC:RFTC:ICFT:RUN
READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_AVG?
READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_MAX?
READ:RFTC:ICFT:DF0_MIN?

No Yes
Test again?

EXEC:AUDIO:TONE_STOP
EXEC:AUDIO:DISC

EXEC:RESET

Close Port

END

151
5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

(1). Basic Function


1. To open RS-232C Port

152
5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

2. To receive RS-232C response

153
5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

3. To send RS-232C commands

4. Variables

5. “Convert String To Number” Function

154
5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

6. To measure “Output Power”

155
5.6 Sample Code(VC++) for RS-232C remote control

156
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

5.7.1 General Function

read_dll_version_string
Description
This function reads version of “blueyes.dll” file.

The version derived from “blueyes.dll” file must be the same with firmware version
of TC-3000C.
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long read_dll_version_string(char *dll_vers);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
dll_vers // the whole version of “blueyes.dll” file

5.7.2 Tester Configuration

read_tester_serial_number
Description
This function reads serial number of TC-3000C.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_serial_number (char *serial_number);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
serial_number // serial number of TC-3000C bluetooth tester.

read_local_ip
Description
This function reads the IP address of a local unit. It is meaningful that the HCI transport layer of a tester is
only for TCP/IP.

Syntax
unsigned long read_local_ip(char *local_ip);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

157
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
local_ip // IP address of user PC. The size could be up to 16 bytes.

write_local_ip
Description
This function writes the IP address of a local unit. It is meaningful that the HCI transport layer of a tester is
only for TCP/IP.

Syntax
unsigned long write_local_ip(char *local_ip);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
local_ip // IP address of user PC. The size could be up to 16 bytes.

read_remote_ip
Description
This function reads the IP address of a remote unit. It is meaningful that the HCI transport layer of a tester is
only for TCP/IP.

Syntax
unsigned long read_remote_ip(char *remote_ip);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
remote_ip // local IP address of TC-3000C. The size could be up to 16 bytes.

write_remote_ip
Description
This function writes the IP address of a remote unit. It is meaningful that the HCI transport layer of a tester is
only for TCP/IP.

Syntax
unsigned long write_remote_ip(char *remote_ip);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
remote_ip // local IP address of TC-3000C. The size could be up to 16 bytes.

read_meas_to
Description
This function writes the timeout of the Measurement command execution in baseband slots (625 us). Refer
to write_meas_to for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_meas_to(unsigned short *meas_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

158
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
meas_timeout // Range : 500 ~ 65535, Time Range : 312.5ms ~ 40.96s.

write_meas_to
Description
This function reads the timeout of the measurement command execution in baseband slots (625 us). If the
measurement is not finished during 'meas_timeout' period of time, the Host Controller stops the
measurement and sends the Process Timeout Error code in the Command Complete event.

Syntax
unsigned long write_meas_to( nsigned short meas_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
meas_timeout // Range : 500 ~ 65535, Default : 2048, Time Range : 312.5ms ~ 40.96s.

read_link_supervision_to
Description
This function writes the link supervision timeout in baseband slots (625 us). Refer to
write_link_supervision_to for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_link_supervision_to(unsigned short link_supervision_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
link_supervision_timeout // Range : 1 ~ 65535, Time Range : 0.625ms ~ 40.9s.
// For TC-3000 the link_supervision_timeout should be greater than 1600 (1 s).

write_link_supervision_to
Description
This function reads the link supervision timeout in baseband slots (625 us). The link_supervision_timeout
parameter is used by the master or slave Bluetooth device to monitor link loss. If, for any reason, no
Baseband packets are received from the DUT for a duration longer than the link_supervision_timeout, the
connection is disconnected.

Syntax
unsigned long write_link_supervision_to(unsigned short link_supervision_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
link_supervision_timeout // Range : 1 ~ 65535, Default : 3200, Time Range : 0.625ms ~ 40.9s.
// For TC-3000C the link_supervision_timeout should be greater than 1600 (1 s).

read_tester_bdaddr
Description
This function reads Bluetooth Device Address (bdaddr)of a tester. Refer to write_tester_bdaddr for more
details.

159
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_bdaddr(unsigned char *bdaddr);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bdaddr // Bluetooth Device Address of a tester.

write_tester_bdaddr
Description
This function writes Bluetooth Device Address (bdaddr) of a tester. The 6 bytes address used to identify each
Bluetooth Device. LSB (least significant bit) of each byte of the array is rightmost. Byte's ordering of the
bdaddr is from left to right. I.e. the first byte (bdaddr[0]) is the least significant byte of LAP (lower address
part) and the last byte (bdaddr[5]) is the most significant byte of NAP (non-significant address).

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_bdaddr(unsigned char *bdaddr);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bdaddr // Bluetooth Device Address of a tester

read_tester_version_information
Description
This function reads the local version information of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_version_information( unsigned short *comp_id, unsigned char
*lmp_vers, unsigned short *lmp_subvers, unsigned char *hci_vers, unsigned short
*hci_rev);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
comp_id // Company ID. Manufacturer Name of the Bluetooth Hardware.
lmp_vers // Version of the Current LMP in the Bluetooth Hardware.
lmp_subvers // Subversion of the Current LMP in the Bluetooth Hardware. Defined by each company.
hci_vers // Version of the Current HCI in the Bluetooth Hardware.
hci_rev // Revision of the Current HCI in the Bluetooth hardware. Defined by each company.

read_tester_version_string
Description
This function reads the local version information of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_version_string( char *tester_vers );

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter

160
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

tester_vers // The local version information of a tester.

read_tester_pin_code
Description
This function writes the PIN length and PIN code(passkey) of a tester. Refer to write_tester_pin_code
for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_pin_code(unsigned char *pin_length, unsigned char *pin);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
pin_length // The PIN code length specifics the length, in bytes, of the PIN code to be used.
// Range : 0 ~ 16
pin // PIN code for the DUT.
// Endianess does therefore not apply to the PIN code Parameter.
// The first byte of the PIN code should be transmitted first.
// Default Value is “30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30”.

write_tester_pin_code
Description
This function reads the PIN length and PIN code(passkey) of a tester. Then PIN is used to authenticate
two Bluetooth Devices(that have not previously exchanged link keys) to each other and create a trusted
relationship between them and is used in pairing precedure to generate the initial link key that is used for
further authentication.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_pin_code(unsigned char pin_length, unsigned char *pin);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
pin_length // The PIN code length specifics the length, in bytes, of the PIN code to be used.
// Range : 0 ~ 16, Default : 4.
pin // PIN code for the DUT.
// Endianess does therefore not apply to the PIN code Parameter.
// The first byte of the PIN code should be transmitted first.
// Default Value is “30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30”.

read_tester_pin_type
Description
This function reads the PIN type of a tester. Tester uses the PIN type information during pairing.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_pin_type(unsigned char *pin_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
pin_type // 0: Variable PIN, 1:Fixed PIN

write_tester_pin_type

161
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Description
This function writes the PIN type of a tester. Tester uses the PIN type information during pairing.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_pin_type(unsigned char pin_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
pin_type // 0: Variable PIN(default), 1:Fixed PIN

read_skip_pairing
Description
This function writes the flag to skip pairing procedure. Refer to write_skip_pairing for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_skip_pairing(unsigned char *skip_pairing);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
skip_pairing // 0:Not skip, 1:Skip.

write_skip_pairing
Description
This function reads the flag to skip pairing procedure. If the flag to skip pairing is 1, the Link Key, which is
defined by write_link_key function will be used for authentication procedure.

Syntax
unsigned long write_skip_pairing(unsigned char skip_pairing);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
skip_pairing // 0:Not skip(default), 1:Skip.

read_auth_link_key
Description
This function reads the Link Key which is used for authentication procedure if the flag to skip pairing is 1.

Syntax
unsigned long read_auth_link_key(unsigned char *link_key);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
link_key // the first byte of 16-bytes array of the link key for the associated BD_ADDR

write_auth_link_key
Description
This function writes the Link Key which is used for authentication procedure if the flag to skip pairing is 1.

162
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long write_auth_link_key(unsigned char *link_key);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
link_key // the first byte of 16-bytes array of the link key for the associated BD_ADDR
// Default value is “00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”.

read_tester_tone_freq
Description
This function reads the tone frequency of the audio signal in Hz which would be send by a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_tone_freq(unsigned short *tone_freq);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tone_freq // Range : 1 ~ 4000

write_tester_tone_freq
Description
This function writes the tone frequency of the audio signal in Hz which would be send by a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_tone_freq(unsigned short tone_freq);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tone_freq // Range : 1 ~ 4000, Default : 1000.

read_tester_tone_ampl
Descriptionis function reads the tone amplitude of the audio signal which would be send by a tester. Refer
to write_tester_tone_ampl for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_tone_ampl(unsigned short *tone_ampl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tone_ampl // Range : 0 ~ 32767.

write_tester_tone_ampl
Description
This function writes the tone amplitude of the audio signal which would be send by a tester.

[Note] How to calculate tone_ampl in relation to Tone Level(dBm0) of TC-3000C GUI ?

163
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

ToneLevel3

tone _ ampl  32767 *10 20


(-70 <= Tone Level(dBm0) <= 3)

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_tone_ampl(unsigned short tone_ampl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tone_ampl // Range : 0 ~ 32767, Default : 7336(-10dBm0).

read_sco_air_codding_format
Description
This function reads the air coding format for SCO links.

Syntax
unsigned long read_sco_air_codding_format(unsigned char *air_coding_format);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
air_coding_format // 0:CVSD, 1:u_law, 2: A_law

write_sco_air_codding_format
Description
This function writes the air coding format for SCO links.

Syntax
unsigned long write_sco_air_codding_format(unsigned char air_coding_format);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
air_coding_format // 0:CVSD(default), 1:u_law, 2:A_law

read_sco_pkt_type
Description
This function reads the packet type the tester shall use for the SCO connection.

Syntax
unsigned long read_sco_pkt_type(unsigned char *sco_pkt_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
sco_pkt_type // 5:HV1, 6:HV2, 7:HV3

write_sco_pkt_type
Description
This function writes the packet type the tester shall use for the SCO connection.

164
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long write_sco_pkt_type(unsigned char sco_pkt_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
sco_pkt_type // 5:HV1, 6:HV2, 7:HV3(default)

read_sco_loopback_delay
Description
This function reads the delay of SCO loopback in milliseconds.

Syntax
unsigned long read_sco_loopback_delay(unsigned short *sco_loopback_delay);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
sco_loopback_delay // Range : 0 ~ 65535.

write_sco_loopback_delay
Description
This function writes the delay of SCO loopback in milliseconds

Syntax
unsigned long write_sco_loopback_delay(unsigned short sco_loopback_delay);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
sco_loopback_delay // Range : 0 ~ 65535. Default : 2000(2 s).

start_sco_loopback
Description
This function enters the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long start_sco_loopback(unsigned short connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // the connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

stop_sco_loopback
Description
This function stops the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long stop_sco_loopback(unsigned short connection_handle);

165
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // the connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

upgrade_tester_licence
Description
This function upgrades the tester licence.

Syntax
unsigned long upgrade_tester_licence(char *file_name );

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
file_name // name of the file which stores the tester licence

read_hci_to
Description
This function reads the timeout of HCI commands execution in miliseconds

Syntax
unsigned long read_hci_to (unsigned short *hci_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hci_timeout // Range : 1 ~ 65535

write_hci_to
Description
This function writes the timeout of HCI command execution in milliseconds.

Syntax
unsigned long write_hci_to(unsigned short hci_timeout);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hci_timeout // Range : 1 ~ 65535, Default : 2000(2 s).

read_tester_agc
Description
This function reads the RX AGC(Automatic Gain Control) value of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_agc(unsigned char *agc);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be

166
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

an error code.

Parameter
agc // 0: OFF, 1: ON

write_tester_agc
Description
This function writes the RX AGC(Automatic Gain Control) value of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_agc(unsigned char agc);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
agc // 0: OFF, 1: ON(default)

read_tester_hc_port
Description
This function reads the number of the device's port (USB, RS-232C...) of a tester to communicate with a HC.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_hc_port (unsigned short *hc_port);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hc_port // the number of the device's port of a tester
// If the device’s port of a tester is USB and its number is 0, it means USB1 of rear panel.

write_tester_hc_port
Description
This function writes the number of ports (USB, RS-232C...) of a tester to communicate with a HC.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_hc_port (unsigned short hc_port);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hc_port // the number of the device's port of a tester
// If the device’s port of a tester is USB and its number is 0, it means USB1 of rear panel.

read_tester_hci_tl
Description
This function reads the type of HCI transport layer of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_hci_tl (unsigned char *hci_tl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

167
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
hci_tl // 0:Autodetect, 1:USB, 2:RS-232C, 16:TCPIP

write_tester_hci_tl
Description
This function writes the type of HCI transport layer of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_hci_tl (unsigned char hci_tl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hci_tl // 0:Autodetect(default), 1:USB, 2:RS-232C, 16:TCPIP

read_tester_iac
Description
This function reads the LAP to derive IAC(Inquiry Access Code) of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_iac (unsigned long *iac);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
Iac // LAP to derive Inquiry Access Code

write_tester_iac
Description
This function writes the LAP to derive IAC(Inquiry Access Code) of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_iac (unsigned long iac);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
Iac // LAP to derive Inquiry Access Code

read_tester_inquiry_to
Description
This function reads the Inquiry timeout of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_inquiry_to (unsigned char *inquiry_to);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_to // Maximum amount of time specified before the Inquiry is halted.

168
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

// Inquiry Time = inquiry_to * 1.28 sec

write_tester_inquiry_to
Description
This function writes the Inquiry timeout of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_inquiry_to (unsigned char inquiry_to);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_to // Maximum amount of time specified before the Inquiry is halted.
// Inquiry Time = inquiry_to * 1.28 sec

read_tester_num_resp
Description
This function reads the maximum number of responses from the Inquiry of a tester before the Inquiry is
halted.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_num_resp (unsigned char *num_resp);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
num_resp

write_tester_num_resp
Description
This function writes the maximum number of responses from the Inquiry of a tester before the Inquiry is
halted.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_num_resp(unsigned char num_resp);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
num_resp

read_tester_page_to
Description
This function reads the page timeout of a tester. Refer to write_tester_page_to for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_page_to (unsigned short *page_to);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter

169
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

page_to // Range : 1 ~ 65535, Time Range: 0.625 ms ~ 40.9 s.

write_tester_page_to
Description
This function writes the page timeout of a tester. The page timeout defines the maximum time the local Link
Manager will wait for a baseband page response from the remote device at a locally initiated connection
attempt. If this time expires and the remote device has not responded to the page at baseband level, the
connection attempt will be considered to have failed.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_page_to(unsigned short page_to);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
page_to // Range : 1 ~ 65535, Time Range: 0.625 ms ~ 40.9 s.

read_tester_port_conf
Description
This function reads the external port configuration of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_port_conf (unsigned char port_num, unsigned char *port_conf);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
port_num // 0:OUT1, 1:OUT2, 3:IN1, 4:IN2
port_conf // For OUT1/OUT2, 0:I_RX, 1:Q_RX, 2:I_TX, 3:Q_TX, 4:RX_BITS, 5:TX_BITS, 6:MOD,
7:DEMOD.
// For In1/In2, 0:OFF1_OFF2,3:RX_IQ_IN, 4:RX_EXT_BIT_1,
// 8:RX_EXT_BIT_2, 48:TX_IQ_IN, 64:TX_EXT_BIT_1,128:TX_EXT_BIT_2

write_tester_port_conf
Description
This function writes the external port configuration of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_port_conf(unsigned char port_num, unsigned char port_conf);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
port_num // 0:OUT1, 1:OUT2, 3:IN1, 4:IN2
port_conf // For OUT1/OUT2, 0:I_RX,1:Q_RX, 2:I_TX, 3:Q_TX, 4:RX_BITS, 5:TX_BITS, 6:MOD, 7:DEMOD.
// For In1/In2, 0:OFF1_OFF2, 3:RX_IQ_IN, 4:RX_EXT_BIT_1,
// 8:RX_EXT_BIT_2, 48:TX_IQ_IN, 64:TX_EXT_BIT_1, 128:TX_EXT_BIT_2

read_tester_rx_gain
Description
This function reads the gain of RX amplifier of a tester.

Syntax

170
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

unsigned long read_tester_rx_gain(unsigned char *rx_gain);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
rx_gain // 0:10 dB, 1:20 dB, 2:30 dB ... 6:70 dB

write_tester_rx_gain
Description
This function writes the gain of RX amplifier of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_rx_gain(unsigned char rx_gain);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
rx_gain // 0:10 dB, 1:20 dB, 2:30 dB ... 6:70 dB

read_tester_rx_att
Description
This function reads the “30 dB RX attenuator” state of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_tester_rx_att(unsigned char *rx_att);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
rx_att // 0: OFF, 1: ON

write_tester_rx_att
Description
This function writes the “30 dB RX attenuator” state of a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_rx_att(unsigned char rx_att);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
rx_att // 0: OFF, 1 : ON(default).

read_tester_tx_pow
Description
This function reads the transmitter power of a tester in 0.01 dBm.

Syntax

171
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

unsigned long read_tester_tx_pow(short *tx_pow);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tx_pow // Range : 0 ~ –8000(0 ~ -80 dBm)

write_tester_tx_pow
Description
This function writes the transmitter power of a tester in 0.01 dBm.

Syntax
unsigned long write_tester_tx_pow(short tx_pow);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
tx_pow // Range : 0 ~ –8000(0 ~ -80 dBm), Default : -3000.

save_tester_param
Description
This function writes parameters of a tester to a file "tester.cnf". If user wants to save all tester parameter’s
value, user has to call this function. If so, the user can reuse previously saved parameters.

Syntax
unsigned long save_tester_param(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

set_default_tx_pow
Description
This function provides setting of default tester power.

If there is active link and required power can not be set during the link, the DUT
will be detached.
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long set_default_tx_pow(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter

172
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

void

tester_close
Description
This function stops a thread, created by the function tester_init() and frees memory allocated during remote
control operations.

Normally the function should be called at the end of the remote control program.
For GUI applications call of the function should be added to a destructor of the
NOTE main object.

Syntax
unsigned long tester_close(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

tester_init
Description
This function allocates memory for the tester structure to store tester’s data and parameters and reads the
parameters from the file ‘tester.cnf’. If the file either does not exist or has incorrect data format, then new file
‘tester.cnf’ will be created with default parameters. The function creates a thread, which supports exchange
of data between remote PC and tester and processing of the data. The function remotely configures a tester
according to tester’s parameters as well.

Normally the function should be called only once. For GUI applications call of the
function should be added to a constructor of the main object.
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long tester_init(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

tester_reset
Description
This function sets Standby state of the tester’s Host controller and clears databases of discovered DUTs and

173
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

links (ACL and SCO) at both Host and Host controller.

Syntax
unsigned long tester_reset(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

write_reference_oscillator_type
Description
This function switches between internal and external reference oscillators of a tester. In order to use your 10
MHz reference oscillator, user has to call this function with external reference oscillator parameter.

Syntax
unsigned long write_reference_oscillator_type(unsigned char type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
type // 0:internal reference oscillator(default), 1:external reference oscillator.

5.7.3 DUT Configuration

read_dut_test_mode
Description
This function reads the test mode of the DUT. Refer to write_dut_test_mode for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_test_mode(unsigned char *test_mode);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode // 1:Transmitter test, 2:Loopback test, 4: Null packet test

write_dut_test_mode
Description
This function writes the test mode of the DUT. The test mode supports testing of the Bluetooth Transmitter
and Receiver. It is intended mainly for certification/compliance testing of the radio and baseband layer and
may also be used for regulatory approval or acceptance on a HW or SW interface shall be allowed.

For audio testing, test mode parameter of write_DUT_test_mode must be 4(NULL


packet test).
NOTE

174
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_test_mode(unsigned char test_mode);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode // 1:Transmitter test, 2:Loopback test, 4: Null packet test

read_connect_before_test
Description
This function reads the flag which defines whether connection (LMP level) should be created before
activation the test mode of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_connect_before_test(char *cr_con);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
cr_con // 0:Set test mode at once after paging, 1: Create connection.

write_connect_before_test
Description
This function writes the flag which defines whether connection (LMP level) should be created before
activation the test mode of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_connect_before_test(char cr_con);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
cr_con // 0:Set test mode at once after paging, 1: Create connection.

read_dut_bdaddr
Description
This function reads Bluetooth Device Address (bdaddr)of a DUT. Refer to write_tester_bdaddr for more
details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_bdaddr(unsigned char *bdaddr);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bdaddr // Bluetooth Device Address of a DUT.

write_dut_bdaddr
Description
This function writes Bluetooth Device Address (bdaddr)of a DUT. The function should be called only in the
case if the DUT does not support inquiry. Use the function write_dut_inq_sup()to set the flag that the DUT

175
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

does not support inquiry. Refer to write_tester_bdaddr for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_bdaddr(unsigned char *bdaddr);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bdaddr // Bluetooth Device Address of a DUT.

read_dut_profile_type
Description
This function reads the type of the pfofile. If user want to use BT cell phone with upper layer profile for audio
test, the type of the profile must be audiogateway.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_profile_type(char *prof_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
prof_type // 0:No profile type, 6: Headset, 14: Handsfree, 20: AudioGateWay

write_dut_profile_type
Description
This function writes the type of the profile. If user want to use BT cell phone with upper layer profile for audio
test, the type of the profile must be audiogateway.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_profile_type(char prof_type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
prof_type // 0: No profile type, 6: Headset, 14: Handsfree(default), 20: AudioGateWay

read_dut_profile_role
Description
This function reads the flag, which defines whether role(either master or slave) should behave the tester
during initialization the AudioGateway profile.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_profile_role(char *prof_role);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
prof_role // the role of the profile 0:master, 1:slave.

write_dut_profile_role
Description

176
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

This function writes the flag, which defines whether role(either master or slave) should behave the tester
during initialization the AudioGateway profile.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_profile_role(char prof_role);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
prof_role // 0:master, 1:slave.

read_dut_s_m_gain_ctrl
Description
This function reads the flag, which defines whether gain control of the speaker or mikrophone of the DUT
(Headset or Handsfree) should be controlled from a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_s_m_gain_ctrl(char *gain_ctrl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
gain_ctrl // 0:Disable, 1:Enable.

write_dut_s_m_gain_ctrl
Description
This function writes the flag, which defines whether gain control of the speaker or mikrophone of the DUT
(Headset or Handsfree) should be controlled from a tester.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_s_m_gain_ctrl(char gain_ctrl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
gain_ctrl // 0:Disable(default), 1:Enable.

read_dut_speaker_volume_gain
Description
This function reads default value of the speaker volume gain of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_speaker_volume_gain(char * vgs);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
vgs // speaker volume gain of a headset or a handsfree. Range 0...15

write_dut_speaker_volume_gain
Description

177
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

This function writes default value of the speaker volume gain of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_speaker_volume_gain(char vgs);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
vgs // speaker volume gain of a headset or a handsfree. Range 0...15

read_dut_microphone_volume_gain
Description
This function reads default value of the microphone volume gain of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_microphone_volume_gain(char * vgm);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
vgm // microphone volume gain of a headset or a handsfree. Range 0...15

write_dut_microphone_volume_gain
Description
This function writes default value of the microphone volume gain of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_microphone_volume_gain(char vgm);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
vgm // microphone volume gain of a headset or a handsfree. Range 0...15

read_dut_name
Description
This function reads userfriendly name associated with the Bluetooth device and consists of a maximum of
248 bytes coded according to the UTF-8 standard. Size of the string should be sufficient to store the name.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_name(char *name);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
name // userfriendly name associated with the Bluetooth device.

open_remote_hci_tl
Description
This function opens remote HCI transport layer of DUT.

178
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long open_remote_hci_tl(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

close_remote_hci_tl
Description
This function closes remote HCI transport layer of DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long close_remote_hci_tl(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

dut_close
Description
This function calls the dut_detach() function and frees memory allocated for DUT structure during remote
control operations.

Normally the function should be called at the end of the remote control program.
For GUI applications call of the function should be added to a destructor of the
NOTE main object

Syntax
unsigned long dut_close(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

dut_detach
Description
This function detaches the DUT from local link manager. That is to say, if a baseband link with the DUT exists,
then this function disconnects the DUT. Also the function closes HCI transport layer (if it exists) for the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long dut_detach(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

179
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
void

dut_init
Description
This function creates new DUT structure. For more details, the function allocates memory for the DUT
structure to store tester’s data and parameters and reads the parameters from the file ‘dut.cnf’. If the file
either does not exist or has incorrect data format, then new file ‘dut.cnf’ will be created with default
parameters.

Normally the function should be called only once. For GUI applications call of the
function should be added to a constructor of the main object.
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long dut_init(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

new_dut
Description
The function reinitializes (creates) HCI transport layer to the DUT (if necessary) and resets the tester.

Normally the function should be called after every unplugging or replacing of a


DUT.
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long new_dut(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

read_dut_hc_port
Description
This function reads the number of ports (USB, RS-232C...) of a DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_hc_port(unsigned char *hc_port);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be

180
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

an error code.

Parameter
hc_port // the number of the device's port of a DUT.

write_dut_hc_port
Description
This function writes the number of the device's port (USB, RS-232C...) of a DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_hc_port(unsigned char hc_port);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hc_port // the number of the device's port of a DUT.

read_dut_hci_tl
Description
This function reads the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_hci_tl(unsigned char *hci_tl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hci_tl // 0:None, 1:USB, 2:RS-232C, 4:UART, 8:PCMCIA, 16:TCP/IP

write_dut_hci_tl
Description
This function writes the type of HCI transport layer of a DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_hci_tl(unsigned char hci_tl);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hci_tl // 0:None, 1:USB, 2:RS-232C, 4:UART, 8:PCMCIA, 16:TCP/IP

read_dut_inq_sup
Description
This function reads the flag whether the DUT supports inquiry. If parameter of this function is 0(the DUT does
not support inquiry), use the function write_dut_bdaddr.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_inq_sup(unsigned char *inq_sup);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

181
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
inq_sup // 0:Not support, 1:support

write_dut_inq_sup
Description
This function writes the flag whether the DUT supports inquiry. If parameter of this function is 0(the DUT does
not support inquiry), use the function write_dut_bdaddr.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_inq_sup(unsigned char inq_sup);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inq_sup // 0:Not support, 1:support(default)

read_dut_inquiry_scan_interval
Description
This function reads the inquiry scan interval of the DUT measured in number of Baseband slots. Refer to
write_dut_inquiry_scan_interval for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_inquiry_scan_interval(unsigned short *inquiry_scan_interval);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_scan_interval // Range : 18 ~ 4096.

write_dut_inquiry_scan_interval
Description
This function writes the inquiry scan interval of the DUT measured in number of Baseband slots. The
inquiry_scan_interval configuration parameter defines the amount of time between consecutive inquiry scans.
This is defined as the time interval from when the Host Controller started its last inquiry scan until it begins
the next inquiry scan.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_inquiry_scan_interval(unsigned short inquiry_scan_interval);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_scan_interval // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Default : 2048.

read_dut_inquiry_scan_window
Description
This function reads the inquiry scan window of the DUT measured in nmber of Baseband slots. Refer
to write_dut_inquiry_scan_window for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_inquiry_scan_window(unsigned short *inquiry_scan_window);

Return Value

182
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_scan_window // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms.

write_dut_inquiry_scan_window
Description
This function writes the inquiry scan window of the DUT measured in nmber of Baseband slots. The
inquiry_scan_window configuration parameter defines the amount of time for the duration of the inquiry scan.
The inquiry_scan_window can only be less than or equal to the inquiry_scan_interval.

Inquiry Scan is only performed when Inquiry_Scan is enabled (the device is


DISCOVERABLE)..
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_inquiry_scan_window(unsigned short inquiry_scan_window);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
inquiry_scan_window // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms. Default : 18.

read_dut_page_scan_interval
Description
This function reads the page scan interval of the DUT measured in Number of Baseband slots. Refer to
write_dut_page_scan_interval for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_page_scan_interval(unsigned short *page_scan_interval);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
page_scan_interval // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms.

write_dut_page_scan_interval
Description
This function writes the page scan interval of the DUT measured in Number of Baseband slots. The
page_scan_interval configuration parameter defines the amount of time between consecutive page scans
This time interval is defined from when the Host Controller started its last page scan until it begins the next
page scan.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_page_scan_interval(unsigned short page_scan_interval);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

183
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Parameter
page_scan_interval // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms. Default : 2048.

read_dut_page_scan_window
Description
This function reads the page scan window of the DUT measured in Number of Baseband slots. Refer
to write_dut_page_scan_window for more details.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_page_scan_window(unsigned short *page_scan_window);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
page_scan_window // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms.

write_dut_page_scan_window
Description
This function writes the page scan window of the DUT measured in Number of Baseband slots. The
pge_san_window configuration parameter defines the amount of time for the duration of the page scan. The
page_scan_window can only be less than or equal to the page_scan_interval.

Page Scan is only performed when Page_Scan is enabled(the device is


CONNECTABLE)
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_page_scan_window(unsigned short page_scan_window);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
page_scan_window // Range : 18 ~ 4096. Time Range : 11.25 ms ~ 2560 ms. Default : 18.

read_dut_path_loss
Description
This function reads the path losses from the DUT's transmitter to the teser's transmitter in 0.01 dB.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_path_loss(unsigned short *path_loss);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
path_loss // Range : 0 ~ 8000.

write_dut_path_loss
Description

184
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

This function writes the path losses from the DUT's transmitter to the teser's transmitter in 0.01 dB.

Be careful about unit. If you want to set path loss to 20 dBm, you have to input
2000 in parameter
NOTE

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_path_loss(unsigned short path_loss);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
path_loss // Range : 0 ~ 8000. Default : 0.

read_dut_t_pow_step
Description
This function reads the interval of time when the tester must wait until the DUT will reach the new power step
in milliseconds. The user can decrease this parameter value for the purpose of reducing testing time
according to RF characteristics of DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_t_pow_step(unsigned short *t_pow_step);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
t_pow_step // Range : 1 ~ 65535.

write_dut_t_pow_step
Description
This function writes the interval of time when the tester must wait until the DUT will reach the new power step
in milliseconds. The user can decrease this parameter value for the purpose of reducing testing time
according to RF characteristics of DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_t_pow_step(unsigned short t_pow_step);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
t_pow_step // Range : 1 ~ 65535. Default : 1000(1 s).

save_dut_param
Description
This function writes parameters of a DUT to a file "dut.cnf".

Syntax
unsigned long save_dut_param(void);

Return Value

185
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

set_dut_general_type
Description
This function sets the type of a DUT. If type is set to 0(UNKNOWN_DUT), this function can be used to
measure or generate the normal signal of 2.4~2.5 GHz.

Syntax
set_dut_general_type(unsigned char type);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
type // 0:Unknown DUT, 1:Bluetooth DUT(default)

read_dut_baud_rate
Description
This function reads the baud rate of HCI transport layer of a DUT. It is meaningful only for UART, BCSP and
RS-232C.

Syntax
unsigned long read_dut_baud_rate( long int *baud_rate);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
baud_rate // 9600(default) /19200 /38400 /56000 /57600 /115200 /128000 /256000.

write_dut_baud_rate
Description
This function writes the baud rate of HCI transport layer of a DUT. It is meaningful only for UART, BCSP and
RS-232C.

Syntax
unsigned long write_dut_baud_rate(long int baud_rate);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
baud_rate // 9600(default) /19200 /38400 /56000 /57600 /115200 /128000 /256000.

5.7.4 Access Fucntions

activate_dut
Description
This function checks whether a RF link with a DUT exists; and if not, the function will create connection and
set test mode id it is necessary.

186
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long activate_dut(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

connect_dut
Description
This function checks whether a RF link with a DUT exists; and if not, the function will create connection and
set test mode id it is necessary

Syntax
unsigned long connect_dut(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

disconnect_dut
Description
This function checks whether a RF link with a DUT exists and if so, the function will disconnect the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long disconnect_dut(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

create_dut_sco_link
Description
This function creates SCO link with a DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long create_dut_sco_link(unsigned short *connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // the connection handle of created SCO link

remove_dut_sco_link
Description
This function removess SCO link with a DUT.

Syntax

187
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

unsigned long remove_dut_sco_link(unsigned short connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // connection handle of the SCO link to remove

is_dut_sco_link
Description
This function verifies whether SCO link with the DUT exists.

Syntax
unsigned long is_dut_sco_link(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

5.7.5 Security Fucntions

authenticate_dut
Description
This function provides authentication of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long authenticate_dut(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

5.7.6 Profile Fucntions

dut_profile_init
Description
This function initializes the profile.

Syntax
unsigned long dut_profile_init(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

dut_profile_close

188
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Description
This function closes the profile.

Syntax
unsigned long dut_profile_close(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

send_at_command
Description
This function sends an AT command to a headset, a handsfree or audiogateway depending on DUT profile
type.

Syntax
unsigned long send_at_command(char *at_cmd);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
at_cmd // NULL terminated string of the AT command.

read_num_profile_msg
Description
This function calculates how many profile messages were sent to a DUT and received from the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_num_profile_msg(int *num_prfl_msgs);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
num_prfl_msgs // a total number of sent and received profile messages.

read_profile_msg
Description
This function reads a profile message which was sent to a DUT or received from the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long read_profile_msg(char *time, char *tx_rx, char *msg);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
time // a string of the time when the message was sent/received.
// The size of the string must not be lees than 8.
tx_rx // direction of the message. 0: sent to a DUT, 1: received from a DUT
msg // a string of the message. The size of the string must be sufficient to store full message

189
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

5.7.7 Audio Fucntions

start_tone_sig
Description
This function starts sending of audio tone signal to the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long start_tone_sig(unsigned short *connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // the connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

stop_tone_sig
Description
This function stops sending of audio tone signal to the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long stop_tone_sig(unsigned short connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

audio_test
Description
This function measures the parameters of RX audio signal. This is a useful function on DUT that do not have
test mode support, by measuring SINAD and Distortion corresponding to RX test(Sensitivity).

Syntax
unsigned long audio_test(unsigned short connection_handle, short dut_tone_freq, float *pow_peak, float
*frequency, float *rms, float *sinad, float *dist );

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // connection handle of the SCO link to test the parameters of RX audio signal
dut_tone_freq // frequency of the tone signal, with the DUT sends to the tester
pow_peak // peak value of the power in audio spectrum characteristic
frequency // frequency of the audio signal's power density maximum
rms // RMS value of the audio signal
sinad // sinad value of the audio signal
dist // distortion of the audio signal

start_sco_loopback
Description
This function enters the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

Syntax

190
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

unsigned long start_sco_loopback(unsigned short connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // poiner to the connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

stop_sco_loopback
Description
This function stops the SCO loopback mode to send all SCO data back to the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long stop_sco_loopback(unsigned short connection_handle);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
connection_handle // poiner to the connection handle of the SCO link to send tone signal

5.7.8 Signal Generator

start_sig_gen
Description
This function turns on the signal generator

Syntax
unsigned long start_sig_gen(unsigned long frequency,float power,unsigned long bit_pattern, short fm_dev);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
frequency // in KHz. The range is from 2400000 to 2500000
power // TX power in dBm. The range is fom -80dBm to 0dBm
bit_pattern // bit pattern of the signal generator
fm_dev // FM deviation in KHz. The range is from 0KHz to 500KHz. Resolution is 5KHz

stop_sig_gen
Description
This function turns off the signal generator

Syntax
Unsigned long stop_sig_gen(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

191
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

5.7.9 RF Test Cases

outp_pow
Description
This function provides measurement of the maximum peak and average RF output power of the DUT at the
given TX frequency. The frequency is RX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the
TRM/CA/01/C (Output Power) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long outp_pow(unsigned char freq, unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned char pkt_type,
unsigned short num_pkts, unsigned char one_mhz_f, short *power_av, short*power_max,short
*power_min);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
freq // RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT). 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... , 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode // Hopping, 1: OFF, 79: ON(default)
pkt_type // packet type. 0:Longest(default), 3:DM1, 4:DH1, 9:AUX1, 10:DM3, 11:DH3, 14:DM5, 15:DH5
num_pkts // number of packets, Default:1
one_mhz_f // 1MHz filter 0: OFF(default), 1: ON
power_av // the average power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm)
power_max // maximum peak power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm)
power_min // minimum power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).

pow_dens
Description
This function provides measurement of the lowest and highest frequencies below and above the operating
frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if
measured in a 100 kHzbandwidth). The function can be used for the TRM/CA/02/C (Power Density) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long pow_dens(unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned short data_length, short *p_dens,
unsigned long *f_max);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hop_mode // Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON
data_length// length of payload's data. Default:0(longest supported length).
p_dens // maximum value of the power density per 100KHz EIRP
f_max // center frequency at which the power density reaches the maximum value

pow_ctrl
Description
This function provides measurement of the minimum RF-output power and the step of power controllby the
DUT at the given TX frequency. The frequency is RX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the
TRM/CA/03/C (Power Control) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long pow_ctrl(unsigned char freq, unsigned char pkt_type, unsigned short num_pkts, unsigned
char one_mhz_f, short *power_min, short *power_max, unsigned short *power_step_max, unsigned short
*power_step_min);

192
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
freq // RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT). 0(2402 MHz), 1(2403 MHz) ..., 78(2480 MHz)
pkt_type // packet type. 0:Longest, 3:DM1, 4:DH1(default), 9:AUX1, 10:DM3, 11:DH3, 14:DM5, 15:DH5
num_pkts // number of packets, Default:1
one_mhz_f // 1MHz filter 0: OFF(default), 1: ON
power_min // the minimum power (in average) 1 unit = 0.01dBm.
power_max // the maximum power 1 unit = 0.01dBm
power_step_max // maximum power step (1 unit = 0.01dBm).
power_step_min // minimum power step (1 unit = 0.01dBm).

spec_fr_range
Description
This function provides measurement of the the lowest and highest frequencies below and above the
operating frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm
if measured in a 100 kHz bandwidth). The function can be used for the TRM/CA/04/C (TX Output Spectrum
Frequency range) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long spec_fr_range(unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned short data_length, unsigned long*f_l,
unsigned long *f_h);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
hop_mode// Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON
data_length// length of payload's data. Default:0
f_l // lowest frequency below the operating frequencies at which spectral power density drops
// below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a 100 kHz bandwidth).
f_h // highest frequency above the operating frequencies at which spectral power density drops
// below the level of 80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a 100 kHz bandwidth).

spec_20_db
Description
The 'spec_20_db' function provides measurement of the lowest and highest frequencies below and above
the operating frequency at which transmit power drops 20 dB below the highest power value in the transmit
channel at the given TX frequency. The frequency is RX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for
TRM/CA/05/C (TX Output Spectrum -20 dB Bandwidth) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long spec_20_db(unsigned char freq,unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned short data_length,
unsigned long *f_l, unsigned long*f_h);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
freq // RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT). 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... , 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode// Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON
data_length// length of payload's data. Default:0
f_l // lowest frequency in Hz below the operating frequency at which
// transmit power drops 20 dB below the highest power value in the transmit channel

193
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

f_h // highest frequency in Hz above the operating frequencies at which


// transmit power drops 20 dB below thehighest power value in the transmit channel

adj_ch_pow
Description
This function provides measurement of power in adjacent channels.The function can be used for
TRM/CA/06/C (TX Output Spectrum Adjacent channel power)) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long adj_ch_pow(unsigned char freq,unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned short
num_sweeps,unsigned short data_length, short ptx[79]);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
freq // RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT). 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... , 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode // Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON
num_sweeps // number of sweeps at each adjacent channel, Default:1
data_length // length of payload's data. Default:27
ptx[79] // power in adjacent channels

modul_char
Description
This function provides measurement of the modulation index for 11110000 and 1010 bit paterns at the given
TX frequency. The frequency is RX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the
TRM/CA/07/C:(Modulation Characteristics) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long modul_char(unsigned char test_mode, unsigned char freq,unsigned char
hop_mode,unsigned char pkt_type,unsigned short num_pkts,unsigned char one_mhz_f, unsigned
shortdf2_avg_low_lim, unsigned short*df1_avg,unsigned short *bytes_2, unsigned short *num_df2_l,
unsigned short *df2_avg,unsigned short*df2_min);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode// Test Mode. 1:TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), 2:LOOPBACK_TEST
freq // frequency. 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode // Hopping 1: OFF(default), 79: ON
pkt_type // packet type. 0:Longest(default), 4:DH1, 9:AUX1, 11:DH3, 15:DH5
one_mhz_f // 1MHz filter 0: OFF, 1: ON
df2_avg_low_lim // lower limit for average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency
// for the 1010 pattern in Hz divided by 100 (1unit = 100 Hz)
df1_avg // average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency
// for the 11110000 pattern in Hz divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
bytes_2 // number of checked bits with pattern 1010
num_df2_l // number of deviations from the average frequency for the 10101010
// pattern less then low limit (115 KHz)
df2_avg // average of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency
// for the 1010 pattern in Hz divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
df2_min // minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from the average frequency
// for the 1010 pattern in Hz divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)

init_car_freq
Description

194
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

This function provides measurement of the transmitter carrier frequency accuracy at the given TX frequency.
The frequency is RX frequency of a tester The function can be used for the TRM/CA/08/C (Initial Carrier
Frequency Tolerance) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long init_car_freq(unsigned char test_mode, unsigned char freq, unsigned
charhop_mode,unsigned short num_pkts,unsigned char one_mhz_f, short *df0_max, short*df0_min);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode // Test Mode. 1:TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), 2:LOOPBACK_TEST
freq // frequency. 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... , 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode // Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON(default)
num_pkts // number of packets, Default:10
one_mhz_f // 1MHz filter 0: OFF, 1: ON
df0_max // maximal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+'freq') MHz in hundreds Hz
df0_min // minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+'freq') MHz in hundreds Hz

car_freq_drift
Description
This function provides measurement of the transmitter centre frequency drift within a packet at the given TX
frequency. The frequency is RX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the TRM/CA/09/C
(Carrier Frequency Drift) test case.

Syntax
unsigned long car_freq_drift(unsigned char test_mode, unsigned char freq, unsigned char
hop_mode,unsigned char pkt_type, unsigned short num_pkts, unsigned charone_mhz_f, unsigned
charmod_1010, unsigned short df2_avg_low_lim, short *f_drift_max, short *drift_rate_max, unsigned short
*df2_avg, unsigned short *df2_min, unsigned short *bytes_2, unsigned short *num_df2_l);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode// Test Mode. 1:TRANSMITTER_TEST(default), 2:LOOPBACK_TEST
freq// frequency. 0:2402 MHz, 1:2403 MHz, ... , 78:2480 MHz
hop_mode// Hopping 1: OFF, 79: ON(default)
pkt_type // packet type. 0:Longest(default), 4:DH1, 9:AUX1, 11:DH3, 15:DH5
num_pkts// number of packets, Default:10
one_mhz_f// 1MHz filter 0: OFF, 1: ON
char mod_1010// Flag whether Modulation characteristic for 1010 bit pattern must
// be calculated at the same time
df2_avg_low_lim // lower limit for average of all maximum frequency deviations
// from the average frequency for the 1010 pattern in Hz
// divided by 100 (1unit = 100 Hz). This parameter is meningful only if mod_1010 == 1
f_drift_max // maximal frequency drift in hundreds Hz. The frequency drift
// limits apply to the difference between the average frequency of
// the 4 preamble bits f0 and the average frequency of any 10 bits
// in the payload field of the returned packets fk.
drift_rate_max// maximal drift rate in hundreds Hz per 50 us.
// The maximum drift rate applies to the difference between any two adjacent 10 bit groups
// separated by 50 us within the payload field of the returned packets.
df2_avg // average of all maximum frequency deviations from
// the average frequency for the 1010 pattern in Hz divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
df2_min // minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from
// the average frequency for the 1010 pattern in Hz divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)

195
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

bytes_2 // number of checked bits with pattern 1010


num_df2_l // number of deviations from the average frequency for the 10101010
// pattern less then low limit (115 KHz)

ber
Description
This function provides measurement of the Bit Error Rate at the given RX frequency. The frequency is TX
frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the RCV/CA/01(02,06)/C (Sensittivity single/multi slot
packets, Maximum Input Level ) test cases.

Syntax
unsigned long ber(unsigned char bit_pattern, unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned char freq_tx, unsigned
char freq_rx, unsigned char dirty_tx, unsigned char pkt_type, short power, unsigned long
num_bytes_to_check, unsigned long *bytes_received, unsigned long *bits_with_error);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bit_pattern // 0:CONSTANT_ZERO, 1:CONSTANT_ONE, 2:ALTERNATING_1010,
// 3:ALTERNATING_11110000, 4:PSEUDORANDOM
hop_mode // hopping mode, 1:SINGLE_FREQUENCY(default), 2:REDUCED_HOPPING_23
// 5:REDUCED_HOPPING_79, 23:HOP_23, 79:HOP_79
freq_tx // TX frequency of a tester (RX for DUT). 0 - 2402 MHz, 1 - 2403 MHz ...
// 78 - 2480 MHz. Ignored if hopping is ON
freq_rx // RX frequency of a tester (TX for DUT). 0 - 2402 MHz, 1 - 2403 MHz ...
// 78 - 2480 MHz. Ignored if hopping is ON
dirty_tx // dirty transmitter mode. 0: OFF, 1:ON(default)
pkt_type // packet type. If zero, then longest supported packet type.
// The only DH1/3/5 or AUX1 types are supported.
Power // RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm multiplied by 100 (in 0.01dBm)
num_bytes_to_check // minimum number of samples (returned payload bytes) to measure BER
bytes_received // actual number of checked bytes
bits_with_error // number of bits with error

ber_per
Description
This function provides measurement of the Bit Error Rate and the Packet Error Rate at the given RX
frequency. The frequency is TX frequency of a tester. The function can be used for the
RCV/CA/01(02,06)/C(Sensittivity single/multi slot packets, Maximum Input Level ) test cases.

Syntax
unsigned long ber_per(unsigned charbit_pattern,unsigned char hop_mode,unsigned char freq_tx, unsigned
char freq_rx, unsigned char dirty_tx, unsigned char pkt_type, short power, unsigned long
num_bytes_to_check, unsigned long *bytes_received, unsigned long *bits_with_error, unsigned long
*pkts_received, unsigned long *pkts_with_error);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
bit_pattern // CONSTANT_ZERO = 0, CONSTANT_ONE = 1, ALTERNATING_1010 = 2,
// ALTERNATING_11110000 = 3, PSEUDORANDOM = 4
hop_mode // hopping mode: SINGLE_FREQUENCY=1, REDUCED_HOPPING_23=2,
// REDUCED_HOPPING_79=5, HOP_23=23, HOP_79=79
freq_tx// TX frequency of a tester (RX for DUT).
// 0 - 2402 MHz, 1 - 2403 MHz ... 78 - 2480 MHz. Ignored if hopping is ON

196
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

freq_rx // RX frequency of a tester (TX for DUT).


// 0 - 2402 MHz, 1 - 2403 MHz ... 78 - 2480 MHz. Ignored if hopping is ON
dirty_tx // dirty transmitter mode. 0: OFF, 1:ON
pkt_type // packet type(according to Baseband Specification).
// If zero, then longest supported packet type. The only DH1/3/5 or AUX1 types are supported.
power // RX power at the receiver input of the DUT in dBm multiplied by 100 (in 0.01dBm)
num_bytes_to_check // minimum number of samples (returned payload bytes) to measure BER
bytes_received // actual number of checked bytes
bits_with_error // number of the bits with error
pkts_received // actual number of received packets
pkts_with_error // number of the packets with error

mod_outp_pow
Description
This function can be used for combination of the Output Power, Modulation Characteristics, Initial Carrier
Frequency Tolerance, and Carrier Frequency Drift. You can make use of this function for “Quick Test”.

Syntax
unsigned long mod_outp_pow(unsigned char test_mode, unsigned char hop_mode, unsigned char freq,
unsigned char pkt_type, unsigned short num_pkts, short *power_av, short *power_max, short *power_min,
short *df0_max, short *df0_min, unsigned short *df1_avg, unsigned short *df2_avg,unsigned short
*df2_min, unsigned short *num_df2, unsigned short *num_df2_l, short *f_drift_max, short *drift_rate_max);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
test_mode // Test Mode. 1:TRANSMITTER_TEST, 2:LOOPBACK_TEST
hop_mode // hopping mode: SINGLE_FREQUENCY=1, HOP_79=79
freq // RX frequency of a tester (TX for DUT).
// The parameter is meaningful only if hopping mode == SINGLE_FREQUENCY
pkt_type // packet type(according to Baseband Specification).
// If zero, then longest supported packet type. The only DH1/3/5 or AUX1 types are supported.
num_pkts // number of packets to measure Output Power
power_av // pointer to the average power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).
power_max // pointer to maximum peak power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).
power_min // pointer to minimum power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).
df0_max // maximal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+'freq') MHz in hundreds Hertzs
df0_min // minimal deviation of carrier frequencies from (2402+'freq') MHz in hundreds Hertzs
df1_avg // average of all maximum frequency deviations from
// the average frequency for the 11110000 pattern in Hertzs divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
df2_avg // average of all maximum frequency deviations from
// the average frequency for the 1010 pattern in Hertzs divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
df2_min // minimum of all maximum frequency deviations from
// the average frequency for the 1010 pattern in Hertzs divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
num_df2 // number of checked bits with pattern 1010
num_df2_l // number of deviations from the average frequency for the 10101010 pattern
// less then low limit (115 KHz)
f_drift_max // maximal frequency drift in hundreds Hertzs.
// This apply to the difference between the average frequency of the 4 preamble bits f0 and
the // average frequency of any 10 bits in the payload field of the returned packets fk.
drift_rate_max // maximal drift rate in hundreds Hertzs per 50microseconds.
// The maximum drift rate applies to the difference between any two adjacent 10 bit groups
// separated by 50 us within the payload field of the returned packets.

rf_tc
Description
This function executes RF test cases as batch process.

197
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

Syntax
unsigned long rf_tc(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

rf_tc_thread
Description
This function executes RF test cases as batch process using thread.

Syntax
unsigned long rf_tc_thread(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

set_max_dut_power
Description
This function provides setting maximum TX power of the DUT.

Syntax
unsigned long set_max_dut_power(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

exec_stop
Description
This function stops execution of running functions.

Syntax
unsigned long exec_stop(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

5.7.10 Measurement Functions

spectrum
Description

198
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

This function provides measurement of the Spectrum.

Syntax
unsigned long spectrum(unsigned long center_frequency, unsigned short span, unsigned short num_points,
unsigned char trigger, unsigned short threshold, unsigned char acc_type, unsigned long lap, unsigned
short num_sweeps, unsigned char mode, short *data, unsigned short *act_span, unsigned long
*act_frequency);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
center_frequency // center frequency in Hz
span // required span in KHz
num_points // number of points. The value must be power of two.
trigger // If 'trigger' == TRIGGERING_OFF (0x00) then Trigger is off.
// Measurement should to start immediately after receiving by
// a Host Controller the Read_Spectrum command.
// If 'trigger' == TRIGGERING_ON (0x01) then Trigger is on.
// Measurement will start only after receiving RF signal with power
// more than Threshold level.
// If 'trigger' == TRIGGERING_SYNC (0x03) then measurement
// will start if the access code correlator exceeds the trigger threshold
// If 'trigger' == TRIGGERING_RX_SLOT (0x04) measurement will
// start at start time of RX slot
Threshold // Threshold level for triggering in dB multiplied by 100. (1 unit = 0.01dBm)
// The value is meaningfull only if Trigger is on.
acc_type // type of access code. 0:custom, 1:IAC, 2:DAC, 3:CAC.
// Meaningful only if 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC.
Lap // LAP of BD_ADDR to derive an access code.
// Meaningful only if 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC and acc_type == 0 (custom) num_sweeps
// number of sweeps
mode // mode (AVERAGE_MODE / MAXHOLD_MODE). Meaningful if 'num_sweeps' > 1.
data// measurement data. The size must not be less than 'num_points'.
act_span // actual span in KHz
act_frequency // actual measurement frequency in Hz

modul_time
Description
This function provides measurement of the Modulation vs. Time characteristic.

Syntax
unsigned long modul_time(unsigned long carier_frequency, unsigned short resolution, unsigned
shortnum_points, unsigned char trigger, short start_time, short *freq_dev, unsigned short *act_resolution,
unsigned long *act_frequency);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
carier_frequency // carier frequency in Hertzs. If zero then any frequency.
resolution // Time resolution (time interval between two nearest samples of data) in nanoseconds.
num_points // number of points
trigger // If 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_OFF (0x00) then Trigger is off.
// Measurement should to start immediately after receiving by a Host Controller
// the Read_Modulation_Time_Data command.
// If 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC (0x02) then measurement will start
// if the access code correlator exceeds the trigger threshold

199
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

start_time // Time offset in hundreds of nanoseconds from the triggering point.


freq_dev // pointer to initialized array to write the measured data of frequency deviation
// from 'carier_frequency' in Hertzs divided by 100. (1unit = 100 Hz)
act_resolution // actual resolution value in nanoseconds
act_frequency // actual measurement frequency value in Hertzs

power_time
Description
This function provides measurement of the Power-Time characteristic.

Syntax
unsigned long power_time(unsigned char meas_mode, unsigned long frequency, unsigned short
resolution,unsigned short num_points, unsigned chartrigger, short threshold, unsigned char acc_type,
unsigned long lap, short start_time, unsigned short num_sweeps, unsigned char sweep_mode, unsigned
char cal, short *power, unsigned short *act_resolution, unsigned long *act_frequency);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
meas_mode // measurement mode: 0: passive (connectionless), 1: active
frequency // unit : Hz
resolution // time interval between two nearest samples of data in nanoseconds.
num_points // number of points
trigger // If 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_OFF (0x00) then Trigger is off.
// Measurement starts immediately after receiving by a HC the Read_Power_Time_Data
command.
// If 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_ON (0x01) then Trigger is on. Measurement will
// start only after receiving RF signal with power more than Threshold level.
// If 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC (0x02) then measurement will
// start if the access code correlator exceeds the trigger threshold
Threshold // Threshold level for triggering in dB multiplied by 100.
// (1 unit = 0.01dBm). The value is meaningfull only if Trigger is on.
acc_type // type of access code. 0 - custom, 1 - IAC, 2 - DAC, 3 - CAC.
// Meaningful only if 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC.
lap // LAP of BD_ADDR to derive an access code.
// Meaningful only if 'trigger' = TRIGGERING_SYNC and acc_type == 0 (custom)
start_time // Time offset in hundreds of nanoseconds from the triggering point.
// This parameter will be ignored if Trigger is off.
num_sweeps // number of sweeps
sweep_mode // sweep mode (AVERAGE_MODE / MAXHOLD_MODE). Meaningful if 'num_sweeps' > 1.
cal // flag whether calibration must be done. 0:skip calibration, 1:calibrate power data
power // measurement data
act_resolution // actual span in KHz
act_frequency // actual measurement frequency in Hz

power_channel
Description
This function provides measurement of the Power vs Channel characteristic.

Syntax
unsigned long power_channel(short power[79]);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter

200
5.7 Reference Guide for using DLL

power[79] // channel's power data

BB Test Cases

bb_tc
Description
This function executes Baseband test cases as batch process.

Syntax
unsigned long bb_tc(void);

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
void

Error Check

errorcode_2_str
Description
Every API function returns an error code after execution. If the function succeeds, the error code is equal to
zero. When a API function fails, the error code is returned to indicate the reason for the error. This function
can be used to check the error with the pertinent description.

Syntax
unsigned long errorcode_2_str(unsigned long error, char *str );

Return Value
The return value of this function will be zero if the function is successful. Otherwise, the return value will be
an error code.

Parameter
Error // error code
Str // error code description, recommended size : 128 bytes.

201
5.8 Flow Chart for DLL functions

5.8 Flow Chart for DLL functions


< RF Test Cases >

Start
TCP/IP, RS-232C,
USB
write_tester_hci_tl
write_tester_hc_port

tester_init

Initialization(Only one call)


dut_init

write_tester_tx_pow
write_tester_rx_att
write_dut_path_loss Transmitter or Loopback
Basic Configuration
write_dut_test_mode

Connection & Entering Test Mode activate_dut

outp_pow
Measuring RF Test Items ber

Replace DUT

dut_detach
Reset(including Disconnection)
tester_reset

No
Quit ?

Yes
dut_close

Termination(Only one call)


tester_close

End

202
5.8 Flow Chart for DLL functions

< Audio Test >

Start

TCP/IP, RS-232C,
USB
write_tester_hci_tl
write_tester_hc_port

tester_init
Initialization(Only one call)
dut_init

write_tester_tx_pow
write_tester_rx_att
write_dut_path_loss Null Packet
write_dut_test_mode
write_tester_tone_freq
Basic Configuration write_tester_pin_code
write_dut_profile_type

ACL Connection dut_profile_init

SCO Connection create_dut_sco_link

write_tester_tone_ampl(0)
start_tone_sig
Initialization for Audio Measurement delay 100ms
stop_tone_sig

write_tester_tone_ampl

start_tone_sig Replace DUT

delay 1000ms
Measuring Audio Characteristics audio_test

stop_tone_sig

203
5.8 Flow Chart for DLL functions

remove_dut_sco_link

dut_profile_close

dut_detach

Reset(including Disconnection)
tester_reset

No
Quit ?

Yes
dut_close

Termination(Only one call)


tester_close

End

204
5.9 Example using DLL

5.9 Example using DLL


5.9.1 Measuring Output Power

#include <stdio.h>
#include "tester_dll.h"

int main(void)
{
unsigned long int error; // Error code
char err_str[128]; // Error string
int i; // counter
char c = 0;
unsigned short dll_version; // the version of the dll file
unsigned short dll_subversion; // the subversion of the dll file
unsigned short nap;
unsigned long ulap;

// Check DLL version


read_dll_version(&dll_version, &dll_subversion);
if((dll_version != DLL_VERSION) || (dll_subversion != DLL_SUBVERSION))
{
printf("Incorrect version of DLL-file\n");
getchar();
return -1;
}

// Initialization
error = tester_init();
if(error)
{
errorcode_2_str(error, err_str);
printf("Error initialization of the tester. %s\n", err_str);
getchar();
return -1;
}

error = dut_init();
if(error)
{
errorcode_2_str(error, err_str);
printf("Error initialization of the tester. %s\n", err_str);
tester_close();
getchar();
return -1;
}
// End of initialization

// This is main test routines


while((c != '0') && (c != 'q') && (c != 'Q'))
{
while(new_dut())
{
printf(" ! DUT is not plugged in. Check and try again.\nPress 'q' and ENTER to quit or ENTER to continue: ");
c = getchar();
if(c == 'q')
{
tester_reset();

205
5.9 Example using DLL

dut_close();
tester_close();
return -1;
}
}

// Activate the DUT. The code will discover the DUT and create connection.
// Actualy the activation is not neccessary because all of functions of the 2nd level of API
// will activate the DUT automatically. We use this code just to check whther everything is OK
// with the DUT.
printf("DUT is activating...");
error = activate_dut();
while(error)
{
errorcode_2_str(error, err_str),
printf("FAILED. %s\n", err_str);
printf("Press, please:\n");
printf(" - q: quit\n");
printf(" - r: try again\n");
printf("Your choice: ");
c = getchar();
switch(c)
{
case 'q':
case 'Q':
tester_reset();
dut_close();
tester_close();
return -1;
default:
printf("DUT is activating...");
error = activate_dut();
}
}
printf("OK\n");
printf("------------------------------------------------------>\n");
error = read_dut_bd_addr(&ulap, &nap);
if(error)
{
errorcode_2_str(error, err_str);
printf("Error reading DUT BD_ADDR. %s\n", err_str);
}
else printf("DUT BD_ADDR: 0x%.2x%.8lx\n", nap, ulap);

// Output Power (TRM/CA/O1/C)


{
// Parameters of the test case
unsigned char freq[3] ={0,39,78};
// RX frequency of a tester (TX for a DUT). 0 - 2402 MHz, 1 - 2403 MHz ... 78 - 2480 MHz
unsigned char hop_mode = 79;
// 1: Hopping OFF, 79: Hopping ON unsigned char pkt_type = 4;
// packet type (according to Baseband Specification). If zero, then
// longest supported packet type. 4 is DH1 packet unsigned short num_pkts = 1;
// number of packets to test
// Result of the test case short power_av;
// the average power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).short power_max;
// the peak power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm) short power_min;
// the minimum power in dBm multiplied by 100 (1 unit = 0.01dBm).
printf(" -- Output Power (TRM/CA/O1/C)\n");
printf("channel f(MHz)\tPav\tPmax\tPmin\tErrors\n");

206
5.9 Example using DLL

i = 0;
while( i < 3)// Execute for 3 frequency channel
{
error = outp_pow( freq[i], hop_mode, pkt_type, num_pkts, 0, &power_av, &power_max, &power_min);
errorcode_2_str(error, err_str),
printf("%d\t%d\t%.2f\t%.2f\t%.2f\t%s\n",
freq[i], 2402+freq[i], (float) power_av*0.01, (float) power_max * 0.01,
(float) power_min * 0.01, err_str);
++i; // Next frequency
}
}

disconnect_dut();
printf("<------------------------------------------------------\n");
printf("RF test cases are completed.\nPress 'q' and ENTER to quit or ENTER to continue for another DUT: ");
c = getchar();
}
// End of main test routines
// Reset
dut_detach();
tester_reset();

// Termination
dut_close();
tester_close();
return 0;
}

207
5.9 Example using DLL

208
5
Chapter

Appendices

A. Specifications
B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C Bluetooth Tester
C. The list of Save/Recall parameters
Appendix A. Specification

Appendix A. Specification

5.1.1 RF SOURCE
Output Frequency
Range: 2400 MHz ~ 2500 MHz
Accuracy:  46 Hz + Frequency Reference Drift
Resolution: 1 kHz
Switching Time: < 160 us,  75 kHz of the final frequency
Output Level
Range: 0 ~ -80 dBm
Accuracy: 1 dB
Resolution: 0.1 dB
GFSK Modulation
GFSK bit rate : 1 Mbps, B X T = 0.5
Modulation index : 0.32
Modulation index range : 0.28 ~ 0.35 ( Frequency deviation range : 140 kHz ~ 175
kHz)
Modulation index resolution : 0.01
GFSK Modulation
π /4 DQPSK bit rate : 2 Mbps
π /8 DQPSK bit rate : 3 Mbps
GFSK Modulation (Low Energy)
GFSK bit rate : 1 Mbps, B X T = 0.5
Modulation index : 0.5
Modulation index range : 0.45 ~ 0.55 ( Frequency deviation range : 225 kHz ~ 275
kHz)
Modulation index resolution : 0.01

5.1.2 RF ANALYZER
Input Frequency
Range: 2400 MHz ~ 2500 MHz
Accuracy: 46 Hz + Frequency Reference Drift
Resolution: 1 kHz
LO Switching time: < 160 us,  75 kHz of the final frequency
Input Level
Range: -10 ~ -80 dBm (20 dBm ~ -30 dBm with 30 dB attenuator ON)
Absolute Max: 25 dBm
Accuracy: 1 dB,
Resolution: 0.1 dB
Intermediate Frequency
IF Frequency: 70 MHz
Filter BW: 10 MHz Max,
Sampling Rate: 40 MHz
1 MHz Digital Filter ON/OFF

210
Appendix A. Specification

5.1.3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER


Frequency Range: 2400 MHz ~2500 mHz
Max Span: 1,1.25,2,2.5,5,10 MHz
Resolution BW: ~40 kHz at 10 MHz Span.
Averaging: 1~50

5.1.4 FM MODULATION ANALYZER


Modulation: FM, GFSK
Frequency Response: 1.3 MHz with channel filter selected
Deviation range: 0~4 MHz
Resolution: 0.1 kHz
Frequency Accuracy: 1 kHz

5.1.5 POWER-TIME
Level Accuracy:  1 dB
Resolution: 0.1 dB
Trigger Method: Access Code (BT), Power Level

5.1.6 POWER-CHANNEL (BT Mode)


Level Accuracy:  1 dB
Resolution: 0.1 dB
DUT Mode: Null Packet or Test Mode

5.1.7 RX BER TEST (BT Mode)


DUT Mode: Requires Loopback Test Mode
Graph: Log Scale BER-Time or BER-RX Power(TBD)
Reading: %, Instantaneous, Cumulative
Parameters: RX Power, Measurement Data Length, Packet Length/Type

5.1.8 I-Q CONSTELLATION (EDR BT Mode)


DUT Mode: Requires EDR Test Mode
Graph: Display I-Q symbol of DPSK
Parameters: Symbol start point, Number of symbol

5.1.9 TX BER TEST (BT Mode)


DUT Mode: Requires EDR Transmitter Test Mode
Graph: Log Scale TX BER-Time and PER (Packet Error Rate)
Reading: %, Instantaneous, Cumulative
Parameters: Number of packet

5.1.10 DEVM (Differential Error Vector Magnitude)


DUT Mode: Requires EDR Test Mode
Graph: Display DEVM on time axis.

211
Useful test for measuring DEVM variance in a packet.

5.1.11 FREQUENCY REFERENCE


Internal Reference Stability:  1 ppm vs. at -20 ~ 70℃, ±1 ppm/first year
External Reference: 10 MHz

5.1.12 FRONT PANEL


RF In/Out Port: N-type, 50 ohm, VSWR <1.6
Baseband In/Out ports: 4 BNC
- RX (I, Q), TX (I, Q), Demodulation, Modulation, RX and TX Bit streams, RX and TX
Clocks, Audio
5.1.13 REAR PANEL
HCI Interface for DUT: RS-232C, USB, PCMCIA
Remote Programming Interface: TCP/IP (LAN)

5.1.14 MISCELLANEOUS
Operating temperature: 5 ~ 40℃
Line Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Dimension: 375(w) x 432(d) x 220(h) mm
Weight: 10 Kg
Packing Size: 445(w) x 515(d) x 310(h) mm
Packing Weight: approx.13 kg

212
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

5.2.1 Output Power (TRM/CA/01/C)

Goal
Verification of the maximum peak and average RF-output power

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back, Null packets (simple connection).
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT and the
longest supported packet will be selected for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.
4. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to find the
maximum peak and average RF-output power.
5. Hopping mode parameter specifies whether hopping will be used or not for the test.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values are assigned automatically:
Test/Normal Mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: longest
Number of packets: 1
Hopping mode: 79 (Hopping is on)

Additional test conditions


In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode whitening is disabled and the payload’s bit pattern
is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode. The LMP_test_control command is used to set the parameters in the DUT.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT

213
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. For the given channel frequency the tester records output power of the DUT from the start
to the end of a packet. Tester records the highest and the lowest power value in the trace
and calculates average power from 20% to 80% of the trace. The path losses value is
added to the results. To set the path losses value, use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More1/5  PathLoss. This step is repeating for specified number of packets (see the
“Number of packets” parameter) and for each frequency channel. If the frequency channel is
changed and the hoping mode is the single frequency mode, the tester sets new
parameters of the test mode using LMP_test_control command.

Test Results
Pav is the average RF-output power of the DUT for given frequency channel, measured in
dBm.
Pmax is the maximum peak RF-output power of the DUT for given frequency channel,
measured in dBm.
Pmin is the minimum RF-output power of the DUT for given frequency channel, measured in
dBm. The result has only informative character and is not used to reach a verdict.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of average power”
“Lower Limit of average power”
“Upper Limit of peak power”
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

5.2.2 Power Density (TRM/CA/02/C)

Goal
Verification of the maximum RF-output power density

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back, Null packets (simple connection).
2. Data length parameter specifies which length of the packet’s payload will be used for the
test case. If the parameter is equal to 0 then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT

214
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

and the longest supported length of a packet will be chosen for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Data length: 0 (longest supported length)

Additional test conditions


Hopping is on. In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode whitening is disabled, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode. The LMP_test_control command is used to set the parameters in the DUT.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The tester measures spectrum. The spectrum analyzer settings are:
Spectrum measurement method: FFT
Center frequency: 2450 MHz
Span: 100 MHz
Resolution Bandwidth: 10 kHz
Detector: Peak
Mode: Maxhold
Trigger: start time of the tester’s RX slot
Sweeptime: tester’s RX slot
Number of sweeps: 255

Tester integrates the spectrum data for each 100KHz bandwidth frequency domain and scans
within the span to find peak value of the calculated power. The peak power and related the
center frequency of 100KHz interval is recorded. The path losses value is added to the results
of the peak power. To set the path losses value use: MenuConfiguration DUTMore1/5
PathLoss.

Test Results
P_density is the peak value of power measured in dBm within 100KHz frequency bandwidth.
freq is the center frequency of the 100KHz frequency bandwidth where the peak value of the
power density was detected measured in MHz.
To reach a verdict the test result is compared with the limit parameter:
“Upper Limit of power density”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is

215
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

selected then the displayed value of the parameter is ignored and the value according to RF
Test Specification [1] is assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (MenuConfigurationDUTHCI Port).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

5.2.3 Power Control (TRM/CA/03/C)

Goal
Verification of the TX power control

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back, Null packets (simple connection).
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT and the
longest supported packet will be chosen for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.
4. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to find the
average RF-output power for each power step.
5. Measurement method specifies the algorithm, which will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to 0 then the algorithm, described in [1] is used. If the parameter is
equal to 1 then fast algorithm is used.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal Mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: DH1
Number of packets: 1
Measurement method: 0 (BT Spec)

Additional test conditions


In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode whitening is disabled, the payload’s bit pattern is
PRBS9. If the Measurement method = 0, then in Transmitter test and Loop back test mode the

216
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

hopping is off. The hopping is on in all of another cases.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Packet type and
Measurement method. The LMP_test_control command is used to set the parameters in
the DUT.
3. For the given frequency channel the tester measures average power from the start to end
of a packet (see details in the Output Power (TRM/CA/01/C) test case). If the
Measurement method = 1, the tester measures the average power for all of frequency
channels, described in the BT channels parameter.
4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
5. The tester repeats step 3 until minimum possible output power step of the DUT is reached
(LMP_min_power response is received from the DUT). The tester records the power step
size (difference between two nearest output power measurements) and the power at the
minimum power step. The path losses value is added to the last result. To set the path
losses value use Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  PathLoss.
6. The tester increases DUT's output power one step using LMP_incr_power_req command.
The output power at the given power step is measured and step size is recorded by the
tester.
7. The tester repeats step 6 to the maximum possible output power setting of the DUT. The
tester measures and records the maximum power.
8. If the Measurement method = 0, then the tester repeats steps 3 to 6 for each frequency
channel (see the “BT channels” parameter).

Test Results
Pmin is the minimum average output power of the DUT for given frequency channel,
measured in dBm.
Pmax is the maximum average output power of the DUT for given frequency channel,
measured in dBm. The result has only informative character and is not used to reach a verdict.
Pst_min is the minimum power step size for given frequency channel, measured in dB.
Pst_max is the maximum power step size for given frequency channel, measured in dBm.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the minimum power”
“Upper Limit of maximum power step size”
“Lower Limit of the minimum power step size”
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

217
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCI Port).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

5.2.4 TX Output Spectrum – Frequency range (TRM/CA/04/C)

Goal
Verification if the emissions inside the operating frequency range are within the limits.

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back, Null packets (simple connection).
2. Data length parameter specifies which length of the packet’s payload will be used for the
test case. If the parameter is equal to 0 then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT
and the longest supported length of a packet will be chosen for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.
3. Number of sweeps is the number of sweeps parameter of spectrum analyzer.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Data length: 0 (longest supported length)
Number of sweeps: 1

Additional test conditions


In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode the hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the DUT is set
to lowest TX frequency. The tester measures spectrum. The spectrum analyzer settings
are:
- Spectrum measurement method: FFT

218
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

- Center frequency: 2402 MHz


- Span: 10 MHz (1 slot packets), 6.667 MHz (3,5 slot packets)
- Resolution Bandwidth: 100 kHz
- Detector: Peak
- Mode: Average
- Trigger: start of the RX packet
- Sweep time: duration of the RX packet
- Number of sweeps: defined by a user in the Number of sweeps test case parameter.
The path losses value is added to the results. To set the path losses value, use Menu 
Configuration  DUT  More1/5  PathLoss. Tester searches the lowest frequency
below the operating frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of –
80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a 100 kHz bandwidth). This frequency is called
f_l and is recorded in the test report.
5. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester sets
the DUT to transmit on highest TX frequency. The tester measures spectrum. The
spectrum analyzer settings are:
- Spectrum measurement method: FFT
- Center frequency: 2480 MHz
- Span: 10 MHz (1 slot packets), 6.667 MHz (3,5 slot packets)
- Resolution Bandwidth: 100 kHz
- Detector: Peak
- Mode: Average
- Trigger: start of the RX packet
- Sweep time: duration of the RX packet
- Number of sweeps: defined by a user in the Number of sweeps test case parameter.

The path losses value is added to the results. Tester searches the highest frequency above
the operating frequencies at which spectral power density drops below the level of –80
dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a 100 kHz bandwidth). This frequency is called f_h
and is recorded in the test report.

Test Results
f_l is the lowest frequency, measured in MHz, below the operating frequencies at which
spectral power density drops below the level of –80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a
100 kHz bandwidth).
f_h is the highest frequency, measured in MHz, above the operating frequencies at which
spectral power density drops below the level of –80 dBm/Hz e.i.r.p (-30 dBm if measured in a
100 kHz bandwidth).
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Lower Limit of the lowest frequency”
“Upper Limit of the highest frequency”
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI

219
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCI Port).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

5.2.5 TX Output Spectrum – 20 dB Bandwidth (TRM/CA/05/C)

Goal
Verification if the emissions inside the operating frequency range are within the limits.

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back, Null packets (simple connection).
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Data length parameter specifies which length of the packet’s payload will be used for the
test case. If the parameter is equal to 0 then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT
and the longest supported length of a packet will be chosen for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.
4. Number of sweeps is the number of sweeps parameter of spectrum analyzer.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Data length: 0 (longest supported length)
Number of sweeps: 1

Additional test conditions


In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode the hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req

220
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the DUT is
set to given channel TX frequency. The tester measures spectrum. The spectrum
analyzer settings are:
- Spectrum measurement method: FFT
- Center frequency: channel frequency
- Span: 2.5 MHz
- Resolution Bandwidth: 10 kHz
- Detector: Peak
- Mode: Maxhold
- Trigger: start of the RX packet
- Sweep time: duration of the RX packet
- Number of sweeps: defined by a user in the Number of sweeps test case parameter
5. Tester searches the highest power value in the transmit channel (peak of the emission).
6. Tester searches lowest frequency below the operating frequency, at which transmit power
drops 20 dB below the level measured in step 5. This frequency is called f_l and is
recorded in the test report.
Tester searches highest frequency above the operating frequencies, at which transmit
power drops 20 dB below the level measured in step 5. This frequency is called f_h and is
recorded in the test report.
7. The difference between the frequencies f_h-f_l measured in the former steps is the 20 dB
bandwidth and is recorded in the test report.
8. Tester repeats the steps 4 to 7 for each channel frequency (see the “BT channels”
parameter).

Test Results
f_l is the lowest frequency, measured in MHz, below the operating frequency, at which
transmit power drops 20 dB below the highest power value in the transmit channel.
f_h is the is the highest frequency, measured in MHz, below the operating frequency, at
which transmit power drops 20 dB below the highest power value in the transmit channel..
f_h-f_l is the 20 dB bandwidth for the transmit channel, measured in MHz.
To reach a verdict the test results is compared with the limit parameter:
“Upper Limit of 20 dB bandwidth”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of the parameters are ignored and the value according to
RF Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

221
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

5.2.6 TX Output Spectrum – Adjacent channel power (TRM/CA/06/C)

Goal
Verification if the emissions inside the operating frequency range are within the limits.

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2422MHz,
2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Data length parameter specifies which length of the packet’s payload will be used for the
test case. If the parameter is equal to 0 then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT
and the longest supported length of a packet will be chosen for the test case.
Note. This parameter is ignored in Null packets test mode.
4. Number of sweeps is the number of sweeps parameter of spectrum analyzer.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 3-39-75
Data length: 27 (the longest length of DH1 packet)
Number of sweeps: 1

Additional test conditions


Hopping is off, whitening is disabled and the payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Data
length.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel. The transmit frequency is
defined by the index M (f(M)=(2402+ch)MHz). In the same way the measurement
frequency is defined by the index N.

222
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

5. Tester sets N := 0.
6. Tester sets j := 0.
7. The tester measures spectrum. The spectrum analyzer settings are:
- Spectrum measurement method: FFT
- Center frequency: f(N)
- Span: 2.5 MHz
- Resolution Bandwidth: 10 kHz
- Trigger: start time of the RX slot
- Detector: Average
- Mode: Maxhold
- Trigger: start time of the tester’s RX slot
- Sweeptime: tester’s RX slot
- Number of sweeps: 1
Tester integrates the spectrum data from f(N)-500KHz to f(N)+500KHz for each 100KHz
bandwidth and each calculated power is recorded as Pij.
8. Tester increments j and repeats step 7 until j < Number of sweeps.
9. For each i the tester searches maximum value of the power within sweeps: Pmaxi = max(Pij).
10
10. Tester calculates and records the power of N channel: P(N)=  Pmax i . The path losses
i 1
value is added to the result. To set the path losses value, use

11. Tester increments N and repeats step 6 to 10 for 79 channels, N= 0,78 .


12. Steps 4 to 11 are repeated for each specified TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the
“BT channels” parameter).

Test Results
M is the number of the TX frequency channels of the DUT
P(N) is the power, measured in dBm, in the Nth adjacent channel for given TX frequency
channels of the DUT
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N=2” (in dBm)
“Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N>=3” (in dBm)
“Max. number of excepted channels”
“Upper Limit of the power in excepted channels” (in dBm)
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

223
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

5.2.7 Modulation Characteristics (TRM/CA/07/C)

Goal
Verification of the modulation index

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT and the
longest supported packet will be chosen for the test case.
4. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to calculate
modulation characteristics.
5. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
79 - hopping is on
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: longest
Number of packets: 10
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
Additional test conditions
Whitening is disabled.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode parameters.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).

224
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel.


5. The DUT is set to transmit the 11110000 bit pattern as payload. Tester measures
demodulation characteristics. Each bit is over sampled 10 times for one-slot packets and
8 times for 3,5-slot packets. Tester calculates for each "00001111" 8 bit sequence in the
payload the average frequency over the frequency values of the 8 bits. Then tester takes
the average over all bit samples as the deviation for each bit. For each second, third, sixth
and seventh of the 8 bits the deviation from the average frequency within the bit period is
recorded as df1_max. The average of all the df1_max deviation values measured before
is calculated, and recorded as df1_avg.
6. The DUT is set to transmit the 10101010 bit pattern as payload. Tester measures
demodulation characteristics and calculates for each "01010101" 8 bit sequence in the
payload the average frequency over these 8 bits. For each of the 8 bits the maximum
deviation from this average within the bit period is recorded as df2_max. The average of
all the maximum deviation values measured before is calculated, and recorded as df2_avg.
The minimum value of all deviations df2_max is recorded as df2_min. The rate of the
deviations df2_max, which are less than 115KHz, is recorded as df2_rate.
7. Steps 5 and 6 id repeated for required number of packets (see the Number of packets
parameter).
8. Steps 4 to 8 are repeated for each TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the
BTchannels parameter).

Test Results
df1_avg is the average of all frequency deviations for 11110000 bit pattern as payload,
measured in KHz.
df2_avg is the average of all frequency deviations for 10101010 bit pattern as payload,
measured in KHz.
df2_min is the minimum value of all frequency deviations for 10101010 bit pattern as payload,
measured in KHz. The result has only informative character and is not used to reach a verdict.
df2_rate is the rate of the bits with deviation df2_max less than 115 KHz in percents.
df2/df1 is the ratio of all frequency deviations df2_avg and df1_avg.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Up. Lim. of freq. deviat. for 11110000” (in KHz)
“Low. Lim. of freq. deviat. for 11110000” (in KHz)
“Low. Lim. of freq. deviat. for 1010” (in KHz)
“Max.num.of deviat.for 1010 < low.lim.” (in percents)
“Low. Lim. for the ratio of df2/df1” (in percents)
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

225
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

5.2.8 Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance (TRM/CA/08/C)

Goal
Verification of the transmitter carrier frequency accuracy

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
 Mode.
Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to calculate initial
carrier frequency.
4. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
79 - hopping is on
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
BT channels: 0-39-78
Number of packets: 10
Hopping mode: 79 (hopping is on)

Additional test conditions


Whitening is disabled, Packet type is DH1, the payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9 and payload
data length is 27 bytes.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel.
5. Tester measures demodulation characteristics. Each bit is over sampled 20 times. The
tester makes an integration of the packets' 4 preamble bits and the first bit after 4th

226
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

preamble bit. The calculation starts at the centre of the first preamble bit until the centre of
the first bit following the 4th preamble bit. The DUT's carrier frequency is assumed to be
the result of this integration and is named f0.
6. Steps 5 and 6 id repeated for required number of packets (see the Number of packets
parameter). Maximum and minimum values of the f0 are recorded as f0_max, f0_min.
7. Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for each TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the BT
channels parameter).

Test Results
f0_max is the maximum value of the initial carrier frequency deviation, measured in KHz.
f0_min is the minimum value of the initial carrier frequency deviation, measured in KHz.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Up.lim.of init.car.freq.deviation” (in KHz)
“Up.lim.of init.car.freq.deviation” (in KHz)
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.
Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT
If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.9 Carrier Frequency Drift (TRM/CA/09/C)

Goal
Verification of the transmitter centre frequency drift within a packet

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT and the
longest supported packet will be chosen for the test case.
4. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to measure
carrier frequency drift characteristics.
5. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:

227
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

1 - single frequency (hopping is off)


79 - hopping is on
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: longest
Number of packets: 10
Hopping mode: 79 (hopping is on)

Note. If all of parameters of the test case will be matched with the parameters of the
Modulation Characteristics (TRM/CA/07/C) test case, then both of test cases will be executed
simultaneously. It will reduce the measurement time.

Additional test conditions


Whitening is disabled and the payload’s bit pattern is 10101010.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode parameters.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (To modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit the 10101010 bit pattern as payload on the given frequency
channel.
5. Tester measures demodulation characteristics. Each bit is over sampled 10 times for one-
slot packets and 8 times for 3,5-slot packets. The tester makes an integration of the
packets' 4 preamble bits and the first bit after 4th preamble bit. The calculation starts at the
centre of the first preamble bit until the centre of the first bit following the 4th preamble bit.
The DUT's carrier frequency is assumed to be the result of this integration and is named f0.
Tester integrates frequency deviations for every 10 bit symbols in the payload body. The
calculation starts from the 2nd payload bit. The results are recorded as fk.
6. Step 5 and 6 id repeated for required number of packets (see the Number of packets
parameter). Tester records the maximum frequency drift as f_drift_max = max(abs(fk-f0))
and the maximum drift rate as drift_rate_max = max(abs(fk+5-fk)).
7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated for each TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the BT
channels parameter).

Test Results
f_drift_max is the maximum frequency drift, measured in KHz
drift_rate_max is the maximum drift rate, measured in KHz/50us.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:

228
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

“Upper Limit of the maximum frequency drift” (in KHz)


“Upper Limit of the maximum drift rate” (in KHz/50us)
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.10 EDR Relative Transmit Power (TRM/CA/10/C)

Goal
This test ensures the difference in average transmit power during frequency modulated
[GFSK] and phase modulated [DPSK] portions of a packet is within an acceptable range.

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
2. Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
3. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies
2402MHz, 2422MHz, 2442MHz and 2462MHz.
4. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
5. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to find the
maximum peak and average RF-output power.
6. Hopping mode parameter specifies whether hopping will be used or not for the test.

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values are assigned automatically:
Test/Normal Mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of packets: 1
Hopping mode: OFF

Additional test conditions

229
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

In Transmitter test and Loop back test mode whitening is disabled and the payload’s bit pattern
is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. If the Test Mode parameter is equal to “Transmitter test” or “Loop back” then the tester will
activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all necessary
parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode. The LMP_test_control command is used to set the parameters in the DUT.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. For the given channel frequency the tester records the average power P GFSK over at least
80% of the GFSK portion of the packet and records the average power P DPSK over at least
80% of the DPSK portion of the packet. The path losses value is added to the results. To
set the path losses value, use: Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  PathLoss.
This step is repeating for specified number of packets (see the “Number of packets”
parameter) and for each frequency channel. If the frequency channel is changed and the
hoping mode is the single frequency mode, the tester sets new parameters of the test
mode using LMP_test_control command.

Test Results
Pavfsk is the average RF-output power of the GFSK portion of the packet for given frequency
channel, measured in dBm.
Pminfsk is the minimum RF-output power of the GFSK portion of the packet for given
frequency channel, measured in dBm. The result has only informative character and is not
used to reach a verdict.
Pmaxfsk is the minimum RF-output power of the GFSK portion of the packet for given
frequency channel, measured in dBm. The result has only informative character and is not
used to reach a verdict.
Pavpsk is the average RF-output power of the DPSK portion of the packet for given frequency
channel, measured in dBm.
Pminpsk is the minimum RF-output power of the DPSK portion of the packet for given
frequency channel, measured in dBm. The result has only informative character and is not
used to reach a verdict.
Pmaxpsk is the minimum RF-output power of the DPSK portion of the packet for given
frequency channel, measured in dBm. The result has only informative character and is not
used to reach a verdict.

To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of DPSK and GFSK average power difference in dB”
“Lower Limit of DPSK and GFSK average power difference in dB”
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

230
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode should be enabled (for
Transmitter Test and Loop back Test Modes).

5.2.11 EDR Carrier Frequency Stability and Modulation Accuracy (TRM/CA/11/C)

Goal
This test verifies the transmitter carrier frequency stability and modulation accuracy.

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
2. Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
3. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
4. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
5. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to calculate EDR
carrier frequency stability and modulation accuracy.
6. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
A. 1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
79 - hopping is on

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of packets: 10
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)

Additional test conditions


Whitening is disabled.

231
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the Test Mode, Packet type and
Hopping mode parameters.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req requests
until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time delay between
two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the Pow.SetTime parameter (to
modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT  More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default
value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel.
5. Tester measures the initial frequency error. To measure it, tester selects those bits from the
header that have the same value as both the previous and following bits so are not
significantly affected by inter-symbol interference. Tester calculates Δw1 of those selected
packet header bits that represent a transmitted ‘1’. Tester calculates Δw2 of those selected
packet header bits that represent a transmitted ‘0’. The initial frequency error is Δwi = (Δw1 +
Δw2)/2.
6. Tester partitions the payload into non-overlapping blocks of 50usecs beginning at the
normal start of the synchronization symbol following the reference symbol and finishing at the
nominal end of the final payload CRC symbol. For each block, tester calculates the frequency
error w0 for the RMS DEVM for the block. The frequency error w0 and the RMS DEVM for
each block are recorded.
7. Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for required number of packets (see the Number of packets
parameter).
8. Steps 4 to 7 are repeated for each TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the
BTchannels parameter).

Test Results
wi is the initial carrier frequency error measured form packet header.
W0 is the frequency error of 50-usec DPSK portion.
RMSDEVM is RMS value of Differential Error Vector Magnitude.
PeakDEVM is maximum peak value of Differential Error Vector Magnitude.
df2_rate is the rate of the bits with deviation df2_max less than 115 kHz in percents.
df2/df1 is the ratio of all frequency deviations df2_avg and df1_avg.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper limit of requency error w0 for 50us DPSK blocks in kHz”
“Upper limit of initial frequency error wi in kHz”
“Upper limit of frequency error sum w0 + wi in kHz”
“Upper limit of RMS DEVM”
“Upper limit of Peak DEVM”
“Upper limit of DEVM”
“Lower limit for symbol with DEVM < upper limit in percents”
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

232
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.12 EDR Differential Phase Encoding (TRM/CA/12/C)

Goal
Verification that the modulator correctly differential phase encodes the data.

Parameters
1. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
2. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
3. Number of packets parameter specifies how many packets will be used to calculate EDR
carrier frequency stability and modulation accuracy.
4. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
79 - hopping is on

If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of packets: 100
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)

Additional test conditions


Whitening is disabled. The test case is executed in Transmitter Test mode only.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the Packet type and Hopping mode

233
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

parameters.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel.
5. The DUT transmits packet to the tester with maximum length payload containing PRBS9.
6. Tester demodulates packet and compares each payload with the expected PRBS9 data.
7. Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for required number of packets (see the Number of packets
parameter).
8. Steps 4 to 7 are repeated for each TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the
BTchannels parameter).

Test Results
Bit_err is the bit error rate measured by comparing each payload with the expected PRBS9
data. The result has only informative character and is not used to reach a verdict.
Pkt_err is the packet error rate measured by comparing each payload with the expected
PRBS9 data. The result has only informative character and is not used to reach a verdict.
BER(%) is bit error rate in percent. The result has only informative character and is not used to
reach a verdict.
PER(%) is packet error rate in percent.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper limit the PER”

To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.13 EDR In-band Spurious Emissions (TRM/CA/13/C)

Goal
Verification that the level of unwanted signals from the DPSK transmitter, within the frequency
range used by the devices, is below the required level.

234
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Parameters
1. Test mode: Transmitter test, Loop back.
2. Note. The test case cannot be executed in Null packets Test mode.
3. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
4. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
5. Number of sweeps is the number of sweeps parameter of spectrum analyzer.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Test/Normal mode: Transmitter
BT channels: 3-39-75
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of sweeps: 1

Additional test conditions


Hopping is off.

Test Procedure
1. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
2. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode depending on the parameters Test Mode, Data
length.
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
4. The DUT is set to transmit on the given frequency channel. The transmit frequency is
defined by the index M (f(M)=(2402+ch)MHz). In the same way the measurement
frequency is defined by the index N.
5. Tester sets N := 0.
6. Tester sets j := 0.
7. The tester measures spectrum. The spectrum analyzer settings are:
- Spectrum measurement method: FFT
- Center frequency: f(N)
- Span: 2.5 MHz
- Resolution Bandwidth: 10 kHz

235
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

- Trigger: start time of the RX slot


- Detector: Average
- Mode: Maxhold
- Trigger: start time of the tester’s RX slot
- Sweeptime: tester’s RX slot
- Number of sweeps: 1
Tester integrates the spectrum data from f(N)-500KHz to f(N)+500KHz for each 100KHz
bandwidth and each calculated power is recorded as Pij.
8. Tester increments j and repeats step 7 until j < Number of sweeps.
9. For each i the tester searches maximum value of the power within sweeps: Pmaxi = max(Pij).
10
10. Tester calculates and records the power of N channel: P(N)=  Pmax i . The path losses
i 1
value is added to the result. To set the path losses value, use Menu -> Configuration ->
DUT -> More 1/4 -> Path Loss.
11. Tester increments N and repeats step 6 to 10 for 79 channels, N= 0,78 .
12. Steps 4 to 11 are repeated for each specified TX frequency channels of the DUT (see the
“BT channels” parameter).

Test Results
M is the number of the TX frequency channels of the DUT
P(N) is the power, measured in dBm, in the Nth adjacent channel for given TX frequency
channels of the DUT
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the power in a channel |M-N|=1” (in dBm)
“Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N=2” (in dBm)
“Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N>=3” (in dBm)
“Max. number of excepted channels”
“Upper Limit of the power in excepted channels” (in dBm)
To change the parameters, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the values according to RF
Test Specification [1] are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort).
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.14 Sensitivity – single slot packets (RCV/CA/01/C)

Goal
The sensitivity is tested using a non-ideal transmitter. The EUT must meet the required
sensitivity for this non-ideal signal.

Parameters

236
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the RX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz. This parameter is meaningful only if the
Hopping mode parameter is equal to 1 (hoping is off).
3. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
4. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
BT channels: 0-39-78
RX Power: -70 dBm
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes
Additional test conditions
Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the packet type is DH1, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where
PTX is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s
receiver and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu 
Configuration  DUT  More1/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.
4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).).
5. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
DH1 packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
6. The tester enters dirty transmitter mode [1] and starts the bit error rate measurement.
Tester stops the measurement if the number of returned and processed payload bytes
exceeds required number (see the Number of samples parameter). Tester records actual
number of processed samples and number of bitts with error.
7. Tester stops dirty transmitter mode.

237
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

8. Steps 5 to 7 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).

Test Results
bytes is actual number of returned payload which were processed during BER measurement.
error_bits is the number of bits with error.
BER it the bit error rate in percents.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the BER”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the value, according to RF
Test Specification, are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.15 Sensitivity - multi-slot packets (RCV/CA/02/C)

Goal
Multi-slot packets are sent to the EUT at the sensitivity level. The EUT must meet the required
sensitivity for this non-ideal signal.

Parameters
1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the RX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz. This parameter is meaningful only if the
Hopping mode parameter is equal to 1 (hoping is off).
3. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
4. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the DUT and the
longest supported packet will be chosen for the test case.
5. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:

238
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)


BT channels: 0-39-78
Packet type: longest
RX Power: -70 dBm
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes

Additional test conditions


Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the payload’s bit pattern is
PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where
PTX is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s
receiver and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu 
Configuration  DUT  More1/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.
4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
5. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
6. Tester enters dirty transmitter mode [1] and starts the bit error rate measurement. Tester
stops the measurement if the number of returned and processed payload bytes exceeds
required number (see the Number of samples parameter). Tester records actual number of
processed samples and number of bitts with error.
7. Tester stops dirty transmitter mode.
8. Steps 5 to 7 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).

Test Results
bytes is actual number of returned payload which were processed during BER measurement.
error_bits is the number of bits with error.
BER it the bit error rate in percents.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the BER”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the value, according to RF
Test Specification, are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT

239
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)


If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.16 Maximum Input Level (RCV/CA/06/C)

Goal
Verification of the receiver performance

Parameters
1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the RX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be separated
by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be executed for
four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402 MHz, 2422 MHz,
2442 MHz and 2462 MHz. This parameter is meaningful only if the Hopping mode parameter
is equal to 1 (hoping is off)
3. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
4. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
BT channels: 0-39-78
RX Power: -20 dBm
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes

Additional test conditions


Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the packet type is DH1, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where
PTX is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s
receiver and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu  Configuration
 DUT  More2/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.

240
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
5. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
DH1 packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
6. Tester starts the bit error rate measurement. Tester stops the measurement if the number
of returned and processed payload bytes exceeds required number (see Number of
samples parameter). Tester records actual number of processed samples and number of
bitts with error.
7. Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).

Test Results
bytes is actual number of returned payload which were processed during BER measurement.
error_bits is the number of bits with error.
BER it the bit error rate in percents.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the BER”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the value, according to RF
Test Specification, are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.17 EDR Sensitivity (RCV/CA/07/C)

Goal
Verification of the receiver sensitivity for the 10-4 bit error rate using a non-ideal transmitter.

Parameters
1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be

241
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
4. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
5. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
BT channels: 0-39-78
RX Power: -70 dBm
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes
Additional test conditions
Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the payload’s bit pattern is
PRBS9.

Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where PTX
is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver
and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More1/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.
4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).).
5. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
DPSK packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
6. The tester enters dirty transmitter mode [1] and starts the bit error rate measurement.
Tester stops the measurement if the number of returned and processed payload bytes
exceeds required number (see the Number of samples parameter). Tester records actual
number of processed samples and number of bitts with error.
7. Tester stops dirty transmitter mode.
8. Steps 5 to 7 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).

Test Results
bytes is actual number of returned payload which were processed during BER measurement.
error_bits is the number of bits with error.

242
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

BER it the bit error rate in percents.


To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the BER”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the value, according to RF
Test Specification, are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.18 EDR BER Floor Performance (RCV/CA/08/C)


Goal
Verification of the receiver performance for the 10-5 bit error rate.
Parameters
1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:
1 - single frequency (hopping is off)
5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected.
4. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
5. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
BT channels: 0-39-78
RX Power: -70 dBm
Packet type: 2-longest
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes
Additional test conditions
Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the payload’s bit pattern is
PRBS9.

243
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where PTX
is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver
and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More1/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).).
4. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
DPSK packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
5. The tester starts the bit error rate measurement. Tester stops the measurement if the
number of returned and processed payload bytes exceeds required number (see the
Number of samples parameter). Tester records actual number of processed samples and
number of bitts with error.
6. Steps 4 to 5 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).
Test Results
bytes is actual number of returned payload which were processed during BER measurement.
error_bits is the number of bits with error.
BER it the bit error rate in percents.
To reach a verdict the test results are compared with the limit parameters:
“Upper Limit of the BER”
To change the parameter, use the Edit menu of the test case. If the flag “Use Default” is
selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and the value, according to RF
Test Specification, are assigned automatically.

Requirement to Initial Condition of a DUT


If the DUT can be controlled through HCI, the DUT must be connected to an appropriate HCI
port of the tester and correct value of the HCI Port parameter must be specified in DUT
configuration (Menu  Configuration  DUT  More1/5  HCIPort)
If the DUT does not have HCI then the DUT must be in the Inquiry Scan/Page Scan state
(maximum activity of the scan mode is desirable) and Test Mode must be enabled.

5.2.19 EDR Maximum Input Level (RCV/CA/10/C)

Goal
Verification of the receiver performance at the maximum specified input signal level

Parameters
1. Hopping mode parameter specifies which hopping sequence will be used for the test.
Allowed values of the parameter are:

244
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

1 - single frequency (hopping is off)


5 - reduced hopping sequence
79 - hopping is on
2. BT channels are the TX frequency channels of the DUT, which are selected to test. The
frequency for each channel is calculated as (2402+ch) MHz, where ch is the frequency
channel. The frequency channel is the value from 0 to 78. Any quantity of the frequency
channels can be selected in the TC-3000C. The list of selected channels must be
separated by “-“. For instance, the record “0-20-40-60” means that the test case must be
executed for four frequency channels: 0, 20, 40 and 60, that is for the frequencies 2402
MHz, 2422 MHz, 2442 MHz and 2462 MHz.
3. Packet type parameter specifies which packet type will be used for the test case. If the
parameter is equal to ‘2-longest’ or ‘3-longest’ then the tester will read LMP features of the
DUT and the longest supported packet will be selected for the test case. Only EDR packet
can be selected
4. RX power is expected power at the input of the DUT’s receiver, measured in dBm.
5. Number of samples is the minimum number of returned payload bytes from the DUT.
If the flag “Use Default” is selected then all of displayed values of parameters are ignored and
the listed above values will be assigned automatically:
Hopping mode: 1 (Hopping is off)
BT channels: 0-39-78
RX Power: -20 dBm
Number of samples: 200,000 bytes

Additional test conditions


Test mode is Loop back, hopping is off, whitening is disabled, the packet type is 2-Longest, the
payload’s bit pattern is PRBS9.
Test Procedure
1. The tester calculates and sets the TX power to satisfy requirement of expected power at
the input of the DUT’s receiver. The TX power is calculated as PTX = PRX DUT + PL, where
PTX is the TX power of the tester, PRX DUT is the expected power at the input of the DUT’s
receiver and PL is the path losses. To set the path losses value use Menu  Configuration
 DUT  More2/5  PathLoss.
2. If the DUT is not connected then the tester creates connection via access procedures
(paging and inquiry if necessary).
3. The tester will activate test mode (if the test mode is not activated yet) and will set all
necessary parameters of the test mode.
4. The tester checks whether the DUT transmits at maximum power. If not and the DUT
supports power control, then the tester will consecutively send LMP_incr_power_req
requests until the LMP_max_power response would be received from the DUT. The time
delay between two consequential LMP_incr_power_req requests depends on the
Pow.SetTime parameter (to modify the value use: Menu  Configuration  DUT 
More3/5  Pow.SetTime, default value is equal to 1 second).
5. The DUT is set to receive at the given channel frequency. The tester continuously sends
DPSK packets to the DUT at the given channel frequency.
6. Tester starts the bit error rate measurement. Tester stops the measurement if the number
of returned and processed payload bytes exceeds required number (see Number of
samples parameter). Tester records actual number of processed samples and number of
bitts with error.

245
Appendix B. RF Test Cases of the TC-3000C

7. Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for each channel frequency (see the BT channels parameter).

5.2.20 List of abbreviations

BT – Bluetooth
BER – Bit Error Rate
DEVM – Differential Error Vector Magnitude
DUT – Device Under Test
EDR – Enhanced Data Rate
FFT – Fast Fourier Transform
GUI – Graphic User Interface
HCI – Host Controller Interface
RF – Radio Frequency
RX – Receiver
TX – Transmitter

5.2.21 References

1. Test Specification. RF. Specification 1.2/2.0/2.0+EDR. Revision 2.0.E.2. Bluetooth SIG.


November, 4th, 2004.

246
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Configuration
Tester
HCI TO 2000
SupervisionTO 2
Modulation Index 0.32
Link before Meas Active
Report Format txt
Report Mode Append
BD_ADDR 9abc56781234
LAP for IAC 9e8b33
Tinqscan 2048
Twinqscan 512
Inq. TO 48
# Inq. Responses 1
Tpagescan 2048
Twpagescan 512
Page TO 16000
PIN type Variable
PIN len. 4
PIN code 30.30.30.30
L2CAP TO 30000
RFComm TO 30000
SDP TO 30000
Profile TO 30000
Skip Pairing unchecked
00.00.00.00……(16
Link key
bytes)
AFH Disable
Encryption Enable
Name Discovery Checked
CSR HS1.2 Unchecked
54.43.2D.33.30.30.30.4
Friendly Name
3
Init. Authen. Unchecked
Delay for TC(ms) 0
DUT
DUT Type Bluetooth
HCI Port None
Baud Rate(Invisible) 9600
error stop TC checked
Num. Of recover 0
Path Loss 0.00
Inq. Supported checked

247
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


LAP for IAC 9e8b33
Tinqscan 2048
Twinqscan 18
Inp. TO 48
#Inq. Responses 1
BD_ADDR 000000000000
Tpagescan 2048
Twpagescan 18
Page TO 16000
Pow. SetTime 1000
Conn.for Test Unchecked
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27
RF setting
TX Power -30.00
RX ATT ON
AGC ON
RX Gain 0~10
Peripherals
Ext Outport1 FSK Demod
Ext Outport2 FSK Mod
Ext Inports 1:off 1:off
Network
Remote Ctrl unchecked
Audio
SCO Link
Packet Type HV3
Air Coding CVSD
Delay 2
Type of Profile HandsFree
Send RING Unchecked
Gain control unchecked
Speaker Volume 15
Mic Volume 15
Transfer Type Built-in
Sample Frequency 32000
Subbands 8
Bitpool 32
Audio Test
Tone Freq 1000
Tone level -10
Lower Freq(Hz) 200

248
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Upper Freq(Hz) 3500
CH1 Freq(Hz) 1000
CH2 Freq(Hz) 400
CH1 level(dBm0) -3
CH2 level(dBm0) -3
Audio Spec
Tone Freq 1000
Tone level -10
CH1 Freq(Hz) 1000
CH2 Freq(Hz) 400
CH1 level(dBm0) -3
CH2 level(dBm0) -3
Test Cases
RF
Autodetach checked
Output power
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type Longest
Number of packets 1
Test/Normal Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode ON
Upper Limit of average power in dBm 4.00
Lower Limit of average power in dBm -6.00
Upper Limit of peak power in dBm 23.00
Power Density
Use Default unchecked
Data Length 0
Test/Normal Mode Transmitter
Upper Limit of power density in dBm 20.00
Power Control
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type DH1
Number of packets 1
Measurement method 0
Test/Normal Mode Transmitter
Upper Limit of the minimum power 4.00
Upper Limit of the maximum power step 8.00
Lower Limit of the minimum power step 2.00
Frequency Range
Use Default unchecked
Data Length 0
Test/Normal Mode Transmitter
Number of sweeps 1
Lower Limit of the lowest frequency 2400.00

249
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Upper Limit of the highest frequency 2483.50
20dB Bandwidth
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Data Length 0
Test/Normal Mode Transmitter
Number of sweeps 1
Upper Limit of the 20 dB bandwidth 1000.0
ACP
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 3-39-75
Data Length 27
Test Mode Transmitter
Number of sweeps 1
Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N=2 -20.00
Upper Limit of the power in a channel M-N>=3 -40.00
Max. number of excepted channels 3
Upper Limit of the power in excepted channels -20.00
Modulation
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type Longest
Number of packets 10
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode OFF
Up. Lim. of freq. deviat. For 11110000 175.0
Low. Lim. of freq. deviat. For 11110000 140.0
Max. num. of deviat. for1010<low.lim. 0.100
Low. Lim. for the ratio of df2/df1 80
Init. Carrier Freq.
Tolerance
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Number of packets 10
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode ON
Up. lim. of init. car. freq. deviation 75.0
Low. lim. of init. car. freq. deviation -75.0
Carrier Frequency Drift
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type Longest
Number of packets 10
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode ON
Up. Lim. Of max. freq. Drift 40.00

250
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Up. Lim. Of max. drift rate 20.00
Sensitivity single slot
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Dirty Tx Mode ON
Packet Type DH1
RX power in dBm -70.00
Number of samples in bytes 200000
Upper limit of the BER in % 0.100
Sensitivity muli slot
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Dirty Tx Mode ON
Packet Type DH5
RX power in dBm -70.00
Number of samples in bytes 200000
Upper limit of the BER in % 0.100
Maxmum Input Level
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
RX power in dBm -20.00
Number of samples in bytes 200000
Upper limit of the BER in % 0.100
Quick
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type DH1
Number of packets 2
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode OFF
Upper Limit of average power in dBm 4.00
Lower Limit of average power in dBm -6.00
Upper Limit of peak power in dBm 23.00
Up. Lim. of freq. deviat. For 11110000 in kHz 175.0
Low. Lim. of freq. deviat. For 11110000 in kHz 140.0
Max. num. of deviat. for1010<low.lim. in % 0.100
Low. Lim. for the ratio of df2/df1 in % 80
Up. lim. of init. car. freq. deviation in kHz 75.0
Low. lim. of init. car. freq. deviation in kHz -75.0
Up. Lim. Of max. freq. Drift in kHz 25.00
Up. Lim. Of max. drift rate in kHz/50 us 20.00
BER & FER
Use Default Unchecked

251
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


#BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Dirty TX Mode ON
Packet Type(including EDR) DH1
RX power in dBm -70.00
Number of packets to be sent 500
Upper limit of the BER in % 0.100
Upper limit of the FER in % 100.00
EDR Relative Transmit
Power
Use Default unchecked
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type 2-longest
Number of packets 1
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode OFF
Upper lim. of DPSK and GFSK av. power off. In
1.00
dB
Lower lim. of DPSK and GFSK av. power dif. In
-4.00
dB
EDR Car. Freq. Stab. &
Mod. Acc.
Use Default 0
# BT channels 0-39-78
Packet Type 2-longest
Number of packets 10
Test Mode Transmitter
Hopping Mode OFF
Up. lim. of freq. er. W0 for 50 us DPSK bloks
10.00
in kHz
Up. lim. of initial frequency error wi in kHz 75.00
Up. lim. of frequency error sum w0+wi in kHz 75.00
Upper limit of RMS DEVM for 2 Mbps pkts 0.20
Upper limit of RMS DEVM for 3 Mbps pkts 0.13
Upper limit of Peak DEVM for 2 Mbps pkts 0.35
Upper limit of Peak DEVM for 3 Mbps pkts 0.25
Upper limit of DEVM for 2 Mbps pkts 0.30
Upper limit of DEVM for 3 Mbps pkts 0.20
Low. lim. for symbols with DEVM < up. lim.
99.00
in %
EDR Differential Phase
Encoding
Use Default 0
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type 2-longest
Number of packets 100

252
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Upper limit of the PER in % 1.000
EDR In-band Spurious
Emissions
Use Default 0
# BT channels 3-39-75
Packet Type 2-longest
Test Mode Transmitter
Number of sweeps 10
Up. lim. of the pow. dif. for chan. abs in dB -26.00
Up. lim. of the power in a channel M-N=2 in
-20.00
dBm
Up. lim. of the power in a channel M-N>=3 in
-40.00
dBm
Max. number of excepted channels 3
Up. lim of the power in excepted channels in
-20.00
dBm
EDR Sensitivity
Use default 0
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Dirty TX Mode ON
Packet Type 2-longest
RX power in dBm, -70.00
Number of samples for 1st threshold in bytes 200000
Upper limit of the BER for 1st threshold in % 0.0070
Number of samples for 2nd threshold in bytes 2000000
Upper limit of the BER for 2nd threshold in % 0.0100
EDR BER Floor
Performance
Use Default 0
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Dirty TX Mode OFF
Packet Type 2-longest
RX power in dBm -60.00
Number of samples for 1st threshold in bytes 1000000
Upper limit of the BER for 1st threshold in % 0.0007
Number of samples for 2nd threshold in bytes 20000000
Upper limit of the BER for 2nd threshold in % 0.001
EDR Maximum Input
Level
Use Default 0
# BT channels 0-39-78
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type 2-longest
RX power in dBm -20.00
Number of samples in bytes 200000

253
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Upper limit of the BER in % 0.1
Measurement
spectrum(bluetooth)
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27
FM Mod(bluetooth)
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27
Pow-Time(bluetooth)
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27
Pow-Chan
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27
BER
Bit Pattern PRBS9
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode ON
Packet Type DH1
Host Analyzer
Link
Inq. TO 48
Page To 16000
# Inq. Responses 1
HCI TO 2000
Access Type Full Access
Tinqscan 2048
Twinqscan 512
Tpagescan 2048
Twpagescan 512

254
Appendix C. The list of Save/Recall parameters

Location in GUI Parameters Initial Values


Scan TO 600000
L2CAP TO 30000
RFComm TO 30000
SDP TO 30000
Profile TO 30000
Type of Profile Handsfree
Gain control unchecked
Link Analyzer
Link
Inq. TO 48
Page To 16000
# Inq. Responses 1
HCI TO 2000
Access Type Full Access
Tinqscan 2048
Twinqscan 512
Tpagescan 2048
Twpagescan 512
Scan TO 600000
Test Mode Loopback
Bit Pattern 10101010
Whitening Disable
Hopping Mode OFF
Packet Type DH1
Length 27

255

You might also like